1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2066 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2070 Horizontal scrolling test.
2078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2080 \begin_inset Tabular
2081 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2082 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_layout Section
2128 Input/Word Completion
2129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2131 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_inset Index idx
2149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2180 \begin_layout Standard
2182 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2184 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2185 is used to propose completions.
2188 \begin_layout Standard
2189 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2192 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2197 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2204 \begin_inset space ~
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2213 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2222 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2223 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2227 \begin_inset space ~
2233 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2234 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2235 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2236 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2239 \begin_layout Standard
2241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2242 completions available.
2247 key to accept a proposed completion.
2248 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2250 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2257 \begin_layout Standard
2258 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2259 ing options for text.
2260 The special math option
2264 enables characters to be composed.
2265 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2266 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2269 , you can then input the characters
2270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2281 to a formula to get it.
2282 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2283 of the math toolbar.
2284 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2288 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2289 's installation folder.
2290 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2299 \begin_layout Section
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_inset Index idx
2314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2377 \begin_layout Standard
2378 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2392 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2395 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2399 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2400 \begin_inset space ~
2404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2406 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2413 \begin_layout Standard
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2446 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2450 \begin_layout Labeling
2451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2455 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2456 LatexCommand nomenclature
2458 description "Tabulator key"
2465 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2467 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2468 \begin_inset space ~
2472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2474 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2485 , especially section
2486 \begin_inset space ~
2490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2492 reference "subsec:Lists"
2498 If you are still confused, look in the
2503 \begin_inset Newline newline
2511 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2512 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2516 \begin_layout Labeling
2517 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2521 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2522 LatexCommand nomenclature
2524 description "Escape key"
2532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2539 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2540 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2543 \begin_layout Labeling
2544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2550 \begin_inset space ~
2554 \begin_inset space ~
2561 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2562 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2566 \begin_layout Standard
2567 There are three modifier keys:
2570 \begin_layout Labeling
2571 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2590 LatexCommand nomenclature
2592 description "Control key"
2597 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2598 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2602 \begin_layout Itemize
2611 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2614 \begin_layout Itemize
2623 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2626 \begin_layout Itemize
2635 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2639 \begin_layout Labeling
2640 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2658 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2659 LatexCommand nomenclature
2661 description "Shift key"
2666 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2667 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2670 \begin_layout Labeling
2671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2689 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2690 LatexCommand nomenclature
2692 description "Alt or Meta key"
2697 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2698 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2699 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2705 \begin_inset Newline newline
2708 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2710 menu accelerator keys
2713 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2714 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2718 \begin_layout Standard
2719 For example, the sequence
2720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset space ~
2730 \begin_inset space ~
2736 \begin_inset space ~
2744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2779 \begin_layout Standard
2784 manual lists all other things bound to the
2792 \begin_layout Standard
2793 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2795 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2796 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2797 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2798 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2799 The \SpecialChar LyX
2800 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2801 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2802 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2804 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2820 followed by a capital
2827 \begin_layout Chapter
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2843 \begin_layout Section
2845 \begin_inset Index idx
2848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2857 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_layout Standard
2862 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2863 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2864 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2865 numbering schemes, and so on.
2866 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2867 and format the title of your document differently.
2870 \begin_layout Standard
2875 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2876 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2877 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2878 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2879 picks one for you by default.
2880 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2883 \begin_layout Subsection
2885 \begin_inset Index idx
2888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2895 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2897 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2904 \begin_layout Standard
2905 You can select a class using the
2907 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2908 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2912 \begin_inset Index idx
2915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2922 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2930 \begin_layout Standard
2931 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2936 \begin_layout Description
2937 Article for basic articles
2940 \begin_layout Description
2941 Report for basic reports
2944 \begin_layout Description
2945 Book for writing a book
2948 \begin_layout Description
2949 Letter for US-style letters
2952 \begin_layout Standard
2953 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2954 only uses if you have installed
2955 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 distributions will include
2959 Here are some of the classes.
2960 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2962 Special Document Classes
2971 \begin_layout Description
2972 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2980 \begin_layout Description
2981 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2985 \begin_layout Description
2986 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2987 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2988 There are three article layouts available.
2989 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2990 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2991 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2992 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2997 sequential numbering
2998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3001 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3002 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3003 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3004 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Beamer Layout for presentations
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3013 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3014 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3015 with \SpecialChar LyX
3019 \begin_layout Description
3020 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3023 \begin_layout Description
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3028 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3031 \begin_layout Description
3032 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3035 \begin_layout Description
3036 Foils Used to make transparencies
3039 \begin_layout Description
3040 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3041 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3042 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3043 with \SpecialChar LyX
3047 \begin_layout Description
3048 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3049 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3052 \begin_layout Description
3053 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3056 \begin_layout Description
3057 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3060 \begin_layout Description
3061 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3062 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3063 (Is used by this document.)
3066 \begin_layout Description
3067 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3070 \begin_layout Description
3071 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3074 \begin_layout Description
3079 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3080 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3082 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3086 \begin_layout Description
3087 Slides Used to make transparencies
3090 \begin_layout Description
3092 \begin_inset space ~
3095 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3096 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3099 \begin_layout Description
3100 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3103 \begin_layout Standard
3104 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3106 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3108 Special Document Classes
3115 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3116 of the document classes.
3119 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3123 \begin_layout Standard
3124 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 \begin_inset Index idx
3132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3149 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3150 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3152 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3158 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3163 , are highly specialized.
3165 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3166 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3167 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3168 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3169 by some document class.
3170 There are just too many of them.
3171 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3174 \begin_layout Standard
3175 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3183 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3184 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3185 document class for a new file.
3187 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3190 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3197 manual for information on how to install them.
3198 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3204 \begin_layout Standard
3205 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3206 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3207 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3208 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3209 class files to be used for dissertation
3210 s submitted to those universities.
3211 The \SpecialChar LyX
3212 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3214 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3218 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3224 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3227 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3231 name "subsec:Modules"
3236 \begin_inset Index idx
3239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3248 \begin_layout Standard
3249 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3250 chosen document class.
3251 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3252 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3259 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3263 \begin_inset Index idx
3266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3273 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3277 \begin_layout Standard
3278 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3279 packages or file format converters that are not always
3280 installed by default.
3282 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3283 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3284 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3285 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3287 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 file without the missing prerequisites.
3289 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3290 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3293 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3297 \begin_inset Index idx
3300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3301 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3307 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3315 \begin_layout Standard
3316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3324 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3326 will advise you about these things.
3334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3336 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3338 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3343 \begin_inset Index idx
3346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3347 Document ! Local Layout
3355 \begin_layout Standard
3356 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3357 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3358 : They are intended to be used in
3359 a variety of different documents.
3360 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3361 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3362 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3363 need a specific inset or
3364 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3369 style only that one time.
3370 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3372 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3390 manual for information on how to use it.
3393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3397 \begin_layout Standard
3398 Each class has a default set of options.
3399 Here's a quick table describing them:
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3403 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3409 \begin_layout Standard
3411 \begin_inset Tabular
3412 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3413 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3414 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3415 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3416 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3417 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3879 \begin_layout Standard
3880 You're probably also wondering what
3881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3885 \begin_inset space ~
3889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3893 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3894 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3899 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3904 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3914 headings, there are also
3922 headings, and so on.
3923 We will describe these headings fully in section
3924 \begin_inset space ~
3928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3930 reference "subsec:Headings"
3937 \begin_layout Subsection
3939 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3941 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3946 \begin_inset Index idx
3949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3956 \begin_inset Index idx
3959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3968 \begin_layout Standard
3969 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3971 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3978 \begin_inset space ~
3986 \begin_inset space ~
3991 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3993 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3994 doesn't support special options you want to
3995 use for your document.
3996 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3997 -class and its options, you have to read
4001 \begin_layout Standard
4005 \begin_inset space ~
4012 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4018 \begin_inset space ~
4023 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4024 You can choose between the following five options:
4027 \begin_layout Labeling
4028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 Use default page style of current class.
4036 \begin_layout Labeling
4037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4042 No page numbers or headings.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4054 \begin_layout Labeling
4055 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4060 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4061 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4062 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4063 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4066 \begin_layout Labeling
4067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4072 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4073 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4079 \begin_inset Index idx
4082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4090 How they are defined is explained in section
4091 \begin_inset space ~
4095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4097 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4104 \begin_layout Standard
4105 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4106 \begin_inset space ~
4110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4112 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4119 \begin_layout Subsection
4120 Paper Size and Orientation
4121 \begin_inset Index idx
4124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4125 Document ! Paper size
4131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4133 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4140 \begin_layout Standard
4141 You can find the following options in the menu
4144 \begin_inset space ~
4151 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4155 \begin_inset Index idx
4158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4167 \begin_layout Labeling
4168 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4172 \begin_inset space ~
4177 What size paper to print on.
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4194 \begin_layout Itemize
4200 \begin_layout Itemize
4206 \begin_layout Itemize
4209 US letter, US legal, US executive
4212 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Itemize
4225 \begin_layout Labeling
4226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4231 To choose whether to output as
4242 \begin_layout Labeling
4243 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4247 \begin_inset space ~
4252 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4253 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4256 \begin_layout Subsection
4258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4260 name "subsec:Margins"
4265 \begin_inset Index idx
4268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4275 \begin_inset Index idx
4278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4287 \begin_layout Standard
4288 Paper margins are set in the menu
4290 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4294 \begin_inset Index idx
4297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4306 \begin_layout Standard
4307 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4308 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4309 the paper format and the font size into account.
4312 \begin_layout Subsection
4316 \begin_layout Standard
4317 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4323 That includes the paragraph environments.
4324 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4325 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4326 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4328 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4337 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4339 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4340 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4341 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4344 \begin_layout Section
4345 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4346 \begin_inset Index idx
4349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4350 Paragraph ! Indentation
4358 \begin_layout Subsection
4360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4362 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4369 \begin_layout Standard
4370 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4371 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4374 \begin_layout Standard
4375 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4376 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4377 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4378 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4382 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4388 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4389 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4390 language than English.
4392 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4395 \begin_layout Standard
4396 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4397 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4398 into \SpecialChar LyX
4400 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4403 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4405 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4406 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4407 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4414 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4415 goes to produce a printable file.
4420 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4422 gives you the ability globally to change
4426 these pre-coded spacings.
4427 We will explain more later.
4430 \begin_layout Subsection
4431 Paragraph Separation
4432 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4434 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4439 \begin_inset Index idx
4442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4443 Paragraph ! Separation
4451 \begin_layout Standard
4459 \begin_inset space ~
4467 \begin_inset space ~
4474 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4478 \begin_inset Index idx
4481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4487 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4490 \begin_layout Subsection
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4505 dialog and toggle the
4508 \begin_inset space ~
4513 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4516 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4520 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4521 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4527 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4530 \begin_layout Subsection
4532 \begin_inset Index idx
4535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4536 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4544 \begin_layout Standard
4547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4551 \begin_inset Index idx
4554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4563 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4567 \begin_inset space ~
4576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4577 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4583 \begin_inset Index idx
4586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4593 installed to use this feature.
4598 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4600 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4602 \begin_inset space ~
4607 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4608 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4611 \begin_layout Section
4612 Paragraph Environments
4613 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4615 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4620 \begin_inset Index idx
4623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4624 Paragraph ! Environments
4630 \begin_inset Index idx
4633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4634 Paragraph environments|(
4642 \begin_layout Subsection
4646 \begin_layout Standard
4647 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4650 \begin_layout Standard
4659 } \SpecialChar ldots
4669 \begin_inset Newline newline
4672 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4674 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4675 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4676 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4685 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4688 \begin_layout Standard
4689 A paragraph environment is simply a
4690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4697 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4698 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4699 scheme, labels, and so on.
4700 Additionally, you can
4701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4708 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4709 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4710 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4711 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4713 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4715 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4719 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4720 \begin_inset Graphics
4721 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4727 at the left end of the toolbar.
4729 will change the environment of the
4733 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4734 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4735 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4739 \begin_layout Standard
4748 create a new paragraph using the
4752 paragraph environment.
4754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4761 because if you are in one of these environments:
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Itemize
4782 \begin_layout Itemize
4788 \begin_layout Itemize
4794 \begin_layout Itemize
4800 \begin_layout Itemize
4806 \begin_layout Standard
4808 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4812 , rather than resetting it to
4817 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4818 \begin_inset space ~
4822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4824 reference "sec:Nesting"
4831 \begin_layout Subsection
4835 \begin_layout Standard
4836 The default paragraph environment is
4841 It creates a plain paragraph.
4843 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4844 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4845 this manual) are in the
4852 \begin_layout Standard
4853 You can nest a paragraph using the
4857 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4865 \begin_layout Subsection
4867 \begin_inset Index idx
4870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4879 \begin_layout Standard
4880 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4881 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4890 for thanks or contact information.
4891 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4892 places all of this on a separate page
4893 along with today's date.
4894 For other types of documents, the title
4895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4902 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4906 \begin_layout Standard
4908 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4922 Here's how you use them:
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 Put the title of your document in the
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4934 Put the author name in the
4941 \begin_layout Itemize
4942 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4943 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4949 Note that using this environment is optional.
4950 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4951 will automatically insert today's date.
4952 If you don't want a date, use the option
4954 Suppress default date on front page
4958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4959 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4961 \begin_inset space ~
4969 \begin_layout Standard
4970 You can use footnotes to insert
4971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4978 or contact information.
4981 \begin_layout Subsection
4983 \begin_inset Index idx
4986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4995 name "subsec:Headings"
5002 \begin_layout Standard
5003 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5005 takes care of the numbering for you.
5008 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5010 \begin_inset Index idx
5013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5014 Section headings ! Numbered
5022 \begin_layout Standard
5023 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Enumerate
5057 \begin_layout Enumerate
5063 \begin_layout Enumerate
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5071 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5072 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5073 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5076 \begin_layout Standard
5077 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5078 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5079 You group the book into chapters.
5081 does a similar grouping:
5084 \begin_layout Itemize
5089 is divided into either
5100 \begin_layout Itemize
5112 \begin_layout Itemize
5124 \begin_layout Itemize
5136 \begin_layout Itemize
5148 \begin_layout Itemize
5160 \begin_layout Standard
5161 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5169 Not all document types use the
5173 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5178 is the top-level heading.
5186 \begin_layout Standard
5191 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5192 labels it with its number,
5193 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5195 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5207 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5209 \begin_inset Index idx
5212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5213 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5221 \begin_layout Standard
5222 The unnumbered section headings have a
5223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5230 at the end of their name.
5231 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5232 the table of contents, see section
5233 \begin_inset space ~
5237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5247 Changing the Numbering
5248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5250 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5257 \begin_layout Standard
5258 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5259 in the Table of Contents.
5260 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5262 Just as certain classes start with
5276 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5286 This is something you can change.
5289 \begin_layout Standard
5292 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5296 \begin_inset Index idx
5299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5308 \begin_inset space ~
5312 \begin_inset space ~
5317 you will see two counters.
5322 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5323 numbers a section heading.
5324 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5329 Short Titles of Headings
5330 \begin_inset Index idx
5333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5334 Section headings ! Short titles
5340 \begin_inset Argument 1
5343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5352 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5360 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5361 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5362 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5363 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5366 \begin_layout Standard
5368 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5369 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5370 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5371 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5376 \begin_inset space ~
5382 This will insert a box labeled
5383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5387 \begin_inset space ~
5391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5394 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5395 This also works for captions inside floats.
5396 There can only be one short title per title.
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5403 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5407 \begin_layout Standard
5408 The following information applies to all section headings:
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
5420 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5423 \begin_layout Itemize
5424 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5427 \begin_layout Subsection
5431 \begin_layout Standard
5433 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5447 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5448 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5449 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5450 the text they contain.
5451 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5459 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5462 \begin_layout Standard
5463 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5472 when you start a new paragraph.
5473 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5477 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5478 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5479 have to change back to the
5483 environment yourself.
5486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5495 \begin_inset Index idx
5498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5507 \begin_layout Standard
5508 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5509 time for the differences.
5518 are identical except for one difference:
5522 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5531 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5534 \begin_layout Standard
5535 Here's an example of the
5548 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5550 See – no indentation!
5554 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5555 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5556 the other paragraph.
5559 \begin_layout Standard
5560 Here's another example, this time in the
5567 \begin_layout Quotation
5573 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5574 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5575 the first line, then
5579 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5583 you were quoting other text.
5586 \begin_layout Quotation
5587 Here's a new paragraph.
5588 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5589 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5592 \begin_layout Standard
5593 As the examples show,
5597 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5598 They should put quotes in the
5603 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5607 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5610 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5612 \begin_inset Index idx
5615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5622 \begin_inset Index idx
5625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5641 \begin_layout Standard
5646 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5652 \begin_inset Newline newline
5655 Which I did not rehearse!
5659 It could be much worse.
5660 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5662 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5663 indented a bit more than the first.
5664 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5670 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 And make things look fine
5674 \begin_inset Newline newline
5680 arg "newline-insert newline"
5686 \begin_layout Standard
5691 does not indent both margins.
5692 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5693 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5696 arg "newline-insert newline"
5702 \begin_layout Subsection
5704 \begin_inset Index idx
5707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5723 \begin_layout Standard
5725 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5735 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5736 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5745 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5746 lets you provide your own label.
5747 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5748 describing some general features of all four of them.
5751 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5755 \begin_layout Standard
5756 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5758 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5759 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5768 reset the environment to
5772 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5773 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5774 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5778 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5782 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5789 \begin_layout Standard
5790 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5791 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5792 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5794 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5795 you read all of section
5796 \begin_inset space ~
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5802 reference "sec:Nesting"
5809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5811 \begin_inset Index idx
5814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5821 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5830 \begin_layout Standard
5831 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5835 paragraph environment.
5836 It has the following properties:
5839 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5846 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5849 \begin_layout Itemize
5850 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5854 \begin_layout Itemize
5855 The items can have any length.
5857 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5858 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5865 \begin_layout Itemize
5870 environment inside another
5874 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5878 \begin_layout Itemize
5879 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5882 \begin_layout Itemize
5884 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5887 \begin_layout Itemize
5889 \begin_inset space ~
5893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5895 reference "sec:Nesting"
5899 for a full explanation of nesting.
5903 \begin_layout Standard
5904 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5913 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5916 \begin_layout Standard
5917 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5918 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5921 \begin_layout Itemize
5922 The label for the first level
5926 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5930 \begin_layout Itemize
5931 The label for the second level is a dash.
5935 \begin_layout Itemize
5936 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5940 \begin_layout Itemize
5941 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5945 \begin_layout Itemize
5946 Back out to the third level.
5950 \begin_layout Itemize
5951 Back to the second level.
5955 \begin_layout Itemize
5956 Back to the outermost level.
5959 \begin_layout Standard
5960 These are the default labels for an
5965 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5970 dialog in the submenu
5975 \begin_inset Index idx
5978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5984 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5988 \begin_layout Standard
5989 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5990 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5992 \begin_inset space ~
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5998 reference "sec:Nesting"
6005 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6007 \begin_inset Index idx
6010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6019 name "sec:Enumerate"
6026 \begin_layout Standard
6031 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6032 It has these properties:
6035 \begin_layout Enumerate
6036 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6040 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6045 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6055 environment resets the counter to one.
6058 \begin_layout Enumerate
6071 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6073 Items can have any length.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6080 \begin_layout Enumerate
6081 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6084 \begin_layout Enumerate
6085 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6089 \begin_layout Standard
6098 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6100 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6101 labels the four different levels in an
6108 \begin_layout Enumerate
6109 The first level of an
6113 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6122 \begin_layout Enumerate
6123 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6127 \begin_layout Enumerate
6128 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6131 \begin_layout Enumerate
6132 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6137 \begin_layout Enumerate
6138 Back to the third level
6142 \begin_layout Enumerate
6143 Back to the second level.
6147 \begin_layout Enumerate
6148 Back to the outermost level.
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6152 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6156 environment, see section
6157 \begin_inset space ~
6161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6163 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6168 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6172 \begin_layout Standard
6173 There is more to nesting
6177 environments than we've stated here.
6178 You should read section
6179 \begin_inset space ~
6183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6185 reference "sec:Nesting"
6189 to learn more about nesting.
6192 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6194 \begin_inset Index idx
6197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6206 \begin_layout Standard
6207 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6211 list has no fixed label.
6212 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6221 of the first line as the label.
6225 \begin_layout Description
6226 Example: This is an example of the
6233 \begin_layout Standard
6235 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6239 \begin_layout Standard
6241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6248 it is meant that the first usage of the
6252 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6254 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6262 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6268 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6276 \begin_inset space ~
6280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6282 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6286 for more information.) Here is an example:
6289 \begin_layout Description
6291 \begin_inset space ~
6294 Example: This one shows how to use a
6297 \begin_inset space ~
6309 \begin_layout Description
6310 Usage: You should use the
6314 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6315 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6317 It's not a good idea to use a
6321 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6322 You're better off using
6334 paragraphs into them.
6337 \begin_layout Description
6338 Nesting: You can nest
6342 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6347 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6348 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6349 them from the first line.
6352 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6354 \begin_inset Index idx
6357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6366 \begin_layout Standard
6371 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6372 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6376 \begin_layout Standard
6385 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6387 Here are its properties:
6390 \begin_layout Labeling
6391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6393 \begin_inset space ~
6396 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6405 of each line as the item label.
6410 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6411 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6412 space as described above.
6415 \begin_layout Labeling
6416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6417 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6418 uses different margins for the item label and the
6419 body of the item text.
6420 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6421 label width plus a little extra space.
6425 \begin_layout Labeling
6426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6431 width \SpecialChar LyX
6432 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6433 If the label width is larger, the label
6434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6441 into the first line.
6442 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6443 margin of the rest of the item text.
6446 \begin_layout Labeling
6447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6449 \begin_inset space ~
6452 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6457 environment has the same left margin.
6458 \begin_inset Newline newline
6461 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6464 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6466 \begin_inset space ~
6471 dialog (toolbar button
6474 arg "layout-paragraph"
6481 \begin_inset space ~
6486 determines the default label width.
6487 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6496 multiple times instead.
6497 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6507 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6510 \begin_inset space ~
6515 every time you alter a label in a
6520 \begin_inset Newline newline
6523 The predefined default width is the length of
6524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6532 \begin_inset space ~
6538 \begin_layout Standard
6543 list the same way as the
6547 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6553 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6562 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6563 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6565 \begin_inset space ~
6569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6571 reference "sec:Nesting"
6575 to learn about nesting.
6578 \begin_layout Standard
6579 There is yet another feature of the
6583 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6584 left-justifies the item labels by
6586 You can use additional
6590 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6591 justifies the item label.
6596 are documented in section
6597 \begin_inset space ~
6601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6603 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6608 Here are some examples:
6611 \begin_layout Labeling
6612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6613 Left The default for
6620 \begin_layout Labeling
6621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6622 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6629 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6632 \begin_layout Labeling
6633 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6634 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6645 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6648 \begin_layout Subsection
6650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6652 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6657 \begin_inset Index idx
6660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6669 \begin_layout Standard
6670 The features described in this section require that the module
6672 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6674 is loaded in the document settings.
6675 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6681 \begin_inset Index idx
6684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6694 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6695 Custom Enumerate Lists
6696 \begin_inset Index idx
6699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6700 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6708 \begin_layout Standard
6710 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6713 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6716 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6717 There you add the command
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6728 \begin_layout Standard
6740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6741 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6742 Code, look at section
6743 \begin_inset space ~
6747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6749 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6762 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6769 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6770 For capital Roman numerals replace
6782 in the command above.
6783 For Arabic numerals use
6791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6798 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6813 \begin_layout Standard
6815 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6823 You can only number 26
6824 \begin_inset space ~
6827 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6835 \begin_layout Standard
6836 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6837 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6840 \begin_layout Standard
6841 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6844 \begin_layout Enumerate
6845 \begin_inset Argument 1
6848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6874 \begin_layout Enumerate
6875 \begin_inset Argument 1
6878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6901 \begin_layout Enumerate
6906 \begin_layout Enumerate
6907 \begin_inset Argument 1
6910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 \begin_layout Enumerate
6935 \begin_inset Argument 1
6938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6964 \begin_layout Standard
6965 For this list these commands were used:
6968 \begin_layout Standard
6979 \begin_inset Newline newline
6987 \begin_inset Newline newline
6995 \begin_inset Newline newline
7005 \begin_layout Standard
7012 makes the label emphasized and
7021 \begin_layout Standard
7022 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7030 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7031 lists until you change the definition.
7039 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7041 \begin_inset Index idx
7044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7045 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7053 \begin_layout Standard
7054 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7057 \begin_layout Enumerate
7058 \begin_inset Argument 1
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 \begin_inset Note Note
7083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7084 goes back to default numbering
7092 \begin_layout Enumerate
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7100 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7105 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7110 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7111 to indicate that it is a resumed
7112 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7113 , but in the output.
7116 \begin_layout Standard
7117 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7125 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7134 \begin_layout Standard
7135 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7137 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7138 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7139 of a normal enumeration.
7140 There, insert the command
7143 \begin_layout Standard
7149 \begin_layout Standard
7154 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7158 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 \begin_layout Enumerate
7166 \begin_layout Standard
7167 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7170 \begin_layout Enumerate
7171 \begin_inset Argument 1
7174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7190 This enumeration starts at 4
7193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7195 \begin_inset Index idx
7198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7207 \begin_layout Standard
7208 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7210 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7213 \begin_layout Itemize
7217 \begin_layout Itemize
7218 with standard spacing
7221 \begin_layout Standard
7222 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7224 Add there the command
7228 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7231 \begin_layout Itemize
7232 \begin_inset Argument 1
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 \begin_layout Itemize
7258 \begin_layout Itemize
7262 \begin_layout Standard
7263 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7270 \begin_inset Index idx
7273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7281 For more information see its documentation,
7282 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7292 \begin_layout Standard
7293 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7295 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7296 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7300 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7303 \begin_layout Enumerate
7304 \begin_inset Argument 1
7307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7315 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7328 \begin_layout Enumerate
7329 with negative indentation
7332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7333 Further Customization
7334 \begin_inset Index idx
7337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7338 Lists ! Customization
7346 \begin_layout Standard
7347 You can also change the style of description lists.
7351 \begin_layout Standard
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7358 changes the description label font, the command
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7368 sets the list style.
7371 \begin_layout Standard
7372 An example where the command
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7380 itshape, style=nextline
7383 \begin_layout Standard
7387 \begin_layout Description
7389 \begin_inset space ~
7393 \begin_inset Argument 1
7396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7402 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7404 itshape, style=nextline
7414 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7415 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7419 \begin_layout Description
7421 \begin_inset space ~
7424 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7425 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7426 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7429 \begin_layout Standard
7430 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7436 \begin_inset Index idx
7439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7447 For more information see its documentation
7448 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7458 \begin_layout Subsection
7460 \begin_inset Index idx
7463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7474 \begin_inset space ~
7477 Address: An Overview
7480 \begin_layout Standard
7481 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7482 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7490 \begin_inset space ~
7496 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7497 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7498 gags on the document.
7499 In contrast, you can use the
7506 \begin_inset space ~
7511 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7512 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7516 \begin_layout Standard
7517 Of course, you're not limited to using
7524 \begin_inset space ~
7533 \begin_inset space ~
7538 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7539 some European academic papers.
7542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7546 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7553 \begin_layout Standard
7558 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7559 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7563 \begin_inset space ~
7568 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7569 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7570 Here's an example of each:
7573 \begin_layout Right Address
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 \begin_inset Newline newline
7583 \begin_inset Newline newline
7586 When is it? What is today?
7589 \begin_layout Standard
7593 \begin_inset space ~
7599 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7601 the largest block of text on a single line.
7602 Here's an example of the
7609 \begin_layout Address
7611 \begin_inset Newline newline
7614 Where do I send this
7615 \begin_inset Newline newline
7618 Your post office and country
7621 \begin_layout Standard
7622 As you can see, both
7629 \begin_inset space ~
7634 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7639 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7640 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7646 This makes sense, since
7654 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7655 Thus, you have to use
7662 arg "newline-insert newline"
7667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7668 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7670 \begin_inset space ~
7674 \begin_inset space ~
7679 ) to start a new line in an
7686 \begin_inset space ~
7694 \begin_layout Subsection
7698 \begin_layout Standard
7699 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7700 or list of references.
7702 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7705 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7707 \begin_inset Index idx
7710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7719 \begin_layout Standard
7724 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7725 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7726 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7727 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7741 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7742 The book document classes ignores the
7746 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7750 in a letter document class.
7753 \begin_layout Standard
7758 environment does several things for you.
7759 First, it puts the centered label
7760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7768 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7770 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7771 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7772 the subsequent text.
7773 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7775 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7779 \begin_layout Standard
7780 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7784 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7785 The new paragraph will still be in the
7790 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7791 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7794 \begin_layout Standard
7795 \begin_inset Float figure
7800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7802 \begin_inset Graphics
7803 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7811 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7816 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7837 \begin_layout Standard
7838 We would love to demonstrate the
7842 environment, but since this document is in the
7843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7850 class, we can't do this.
7851 We inserted it therefore as figure
7852 \begin_inset space ~
7856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7858 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7863 If you have never heard of an
7864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7871 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7874 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7876 \begin_inset Index idx
7879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7888 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7895 \begin_layout Standard
7900 environment is used to list references.
7901 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7902 only use it at the end of the document.
7914 \begin_layout Standard
7915 When you first open a
7919 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7920 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7936 depending on the document class.
7937 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7938 Each paragraph of the
7942 environment is a bibliography entry.
7947 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7948 Each new paragraph is still in the
7955 \begin_layout Standard
7956 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7957 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7959 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7961 handling, have a look at section
7962 \begin_inset space ~
7966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7968 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7975 \begin_layout Subsection
7976 Special Environments
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7981 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7982 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7990 \begin_inset Index idx
7993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8003 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8010 \begin_layout Standard
8016 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8018 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8023 key as a fixed whitespace.
8027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8040 \begin_inset space ~
8045 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8063 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8066 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8069 arg "newline-insert newline"
8086 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8087 So, when you finish using the
8092 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8093 Also, you can nest the
8098 environment inside of others.
8101 \begin_layout Standard
8102 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8105 \begin_layout Itemize
8109 arg "newline-insert newline"
8112 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8117 \begin_inset space \space{}
8127 arg "newline-insert newline"
8133 \begin_layout Itemize
8137 arg "newline-insert newline"
8147 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8153 \begin_layout Itemize
8154 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8155 You must put at least one
8159 in any line you want blank.
8160 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8164 \begin_layout Itemize
8165 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8169 since that will insert
8174 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8177 arg "self-insert \""
8183 \begin_layout Standard
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8203 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8204 printf("Hello World!
8209 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8213 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8217 \begin_layout Standard
8218 This is just the standard
8219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8230 \begin_layout Standard
8236 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8238 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8239 as if you used a typewriter.
8240 \begin_inset Index idx
8243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8244 Paragraph environments|)
8249 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8252 Program Code Listings
8257 \begin_inset space ~
8265 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8269 \begin_inset Index idx
8272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8281 \begin_layout Standard
8286 environment is similar to the
8291 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8292 computer console text.
8297 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8311 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8312 you can have empty lines.
8325 \begin_layout Itemize
8326 have a certain language and a text style
8329 \begin_layout Itemize
8330 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8331 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8332 and \SpecialChar TeX
8336 \begin_layout Standard
8337 Because of these properties
8341 works like a typewriter.
8345 \begin_layout Verbatim
8350 \begin_layout Verbatim
8354 The following 2 lines are empty:
8357 \begin_layout Verbatim
8361 \begin_layout Verbatim
8365 \begin_layout Verbatim
8367 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8372 \begin_layout Standard
8377 environment is identical to
8381 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8382 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8389 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8394 \begin_layout Section
8395 Nesting Environments
8396 \begin_inset Index idx
8399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8400 Nesting ! Environments
8406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8415 \begin_layout Subsection
8419 \begin_layout Standard
8421 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8423 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8425 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8427 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8439 \begin_layout Enumerate
8443 \begin_layout Enumerate
8448 \begin_layout Enumerate
8452 \begin_layout Enumerate
8457 \begin_layout Enumerate
8461 \begin_layout Standard
8462 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8463 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8465 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset space ~
8479 \begin_inset space ~
8483 \begin_inset space ~
8488 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8490 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8493 arg "depth-increment"
8499 arg "depth-decrement"
8513 arg "depth-increment"
8519 arg "depth-decrement"
8523 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8524 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8529 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8530 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8531 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8532 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8533 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8539 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8541 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8544 \begin_layout Subsection
8545 What You Can and Can't Nest
8548 \begin_layout Standard
8549 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8550 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8553 \begin_layout Standard
8554 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8555 than a simple yes or no.
8556 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8559 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 Completely unnestable
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8564 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8568 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8573 \begin_layout Standard
8574 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8575 environments have them:
8578 \begin_layout Description
8579 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8580 Can't nest into them.
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8602 \begin_layout Itemize
8608 \begin_layout Itemize
8615 \begin_layout Description
8617 \begin_inset space ~
8620 Nestable You can nest them.
8621 You can nest other things into them.
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8661 \begin_layout Itemize
8667 \begin_layout Itemize
8674 \begin_layout Itemize
8680 \begin_layout Itemize
8687 \begin_layout Description
8688 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8689 You can't nest anything into them.
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8771 \begin_layout Itemize
8775 \begin_inset space ~
8781 \begin_layout Itemize
8788 \begin_layout Standard
8789 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8797 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8807 \begin_inset space ~
8810 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8811 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8812 nested section headings violate this.
8820 \begin_layout Subsection
8821 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8822 \begin_inset Index idx
8825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8826 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8834 \begin_layout Standard
8835 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8836 affected by nesting anyhow.
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Itemize
8848 \begin_layout Itemize
8852 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8862 Figures and tables in
8866 are not affected by this.
8871 Have a look at section
8872 \begin_inset space ~
8876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8878 reference "sec:Floats"
8882 for more information about
8889 \begin_layout Standard
8891 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8892 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8896 \begin_layout Standard
8897 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8905 of its own, it behaves just like a
8906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8913 paragraph environment.
8914 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8918 \begin_layout Standard
8919 Here's an example with a table:
8922 \begin_layout Enumerate
8927 \begin_layout Enumerate
8928 This is (a) and it's nested.
8932 \begin_layout Standard
8933 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8939 \begin_layout Standard
8941 \begin_inset Tabular
8942 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8943 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8944 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9029 \begin_layout Standard
9030 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9037 \begin_layout Enumerate
9039 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9043 \begin_layout Enumerate
9047 \begin_layout Standard
9048 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9051 \begin_layout Enumerate
9056 \begin_layout Enumerate
9057 This is (a) and it's nested.
9061 \begin_layout Standard
9062 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9068 \begin_layout Standard
9070 \begin_inset Tabular
9071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9072 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9158 \begin_layout Standard
9159 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9165 \begin_layout Enumerate
9172 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9175 \begin_layout Enumerate
9179 \begin_layout Standard
9180 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9184 \begin_layout Standard
9185 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9188 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9191 \begin_layout Enumerate
9196 \begin_layout Enumerate
9197 This is (a) and it's nested.
9200 \begin_layout Standard
9201 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9207 \begin_layout Standard
9209 \begin_inset Tabular
9210 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9211 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9298 \begin_layout Standard
9299 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9305 \begin_layout Enumerate
9307 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9314 \begin_layout Enumerate
9318 \begin_layout Standard
9319 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9325 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9326 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9330 \begin_layout Subsection
9331 Usage and General Features
9334 \begin_layout Standard
9335 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9336 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9345 is the innermost possible depth.
9346 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9349 \begin_layout Enumerate
9350 level #1 – outermost
9354 \begin_layout Enumerate
9359 \begin_layout Enumerate
9364 \begin_layout Enumerate
9369 \begin_layout Itemize
9374 \begin_layout Itemize
9383 \begin_layout Standard
9384 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9385 both of them in the example.
9386 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9396 For example, if we tried to nest another
9401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9408 , we would get errors.
9411 \begin_layout Subsection
9413 \begin_inset Index idx
9416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9425 \begin_layout Standard
9426 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9427 We have several examples of nested environments.
9428 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9432 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9433 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9436 \begin_layout Labeling
9437 \labelwidthstring MMM
9438 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9447 \begin_layout Labeling
9448 \labelwidthstring MMM
9449 #2-a This is level #2.
9450 We created it by using
9453 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9459 arg "depth-increment"
9466 \begin_layout Labeling
9467 \labelwidthstring MMM
9468 #3-a This is level #3.
9469 This time, we just enter
9476 arg "depth-increment"
9480 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9484 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9490 arg "depth-increment"
9497 \begin_layout Standard
9502 environment, nested inside of
9503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9511 So, it's at level #4.
9512 We did this by entering
9515 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9521 arg "depth-increment"
9524 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9529 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9545 \begin_layout Standard
9550 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9553 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9559 \begin_layout Labeling
9560 \labelwidthstring MMM
9561 #4-a This is level #4.
9565 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9568 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9573 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9577 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9582 keep nesting things inside
9583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9594 \begin_layout Labeling
9595 \labelwidthstring MMM
9596 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9601 \begin_layout Labeling
9602 \labelwidthstring MMM
9603 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9604 and this is level #6.
9605 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9609 \begin_layout Labeling
9610 \labelwidthstring MMM
9611 #5-b Back to level #5.
9615 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9621 arg "depth-decrement"
9628 \begin_layout Labeling
9629 \labelwidthstring MMM
9633 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9639 arg "depth-decrement"
9642 , we're back at level #4.
9646 \begin_layout Labeling
9647 \labelwidthstring MMM
9648 #3-b Back to level #3.
9649 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9653 \begin_layout Labeling
9654 \labelwidthstring MMM
9655 #2-b Back to level #2.
9660 \begin_layout Labeling
9661 \labelwidthstring MMM
9662 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9663 After this sentence, we will enter
9667 and change the paragraph environment back to
9674 \begin_layout Standard
9675 We could have also used the
9691 environment in place of the
9696 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9700 Example 2: Inheritance
9703 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9704 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9707 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9716 arg "depth-increment"
9720 \begin_inset Newline newline
9723 which, we will change to the
9731 \begin_layout Enumerate
9736 environment, at level #2.
9739 \begin_layout Enumerate
9740 Notice how the nested
9744 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9748 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9752 \begin_layout Standard
9753 We ended this example by entering
9758 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9762 and reset the nesting depth by using
9765 arg "depth-decrement"
9771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9772 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9781 \begin_inset Argument 1
9784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9785 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9793 \begin_layout Enumerate
9794 This is level #1, in an
9798 paragraph environment.
9799 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9803 \begin_layout Enumerate
9808 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9814 arg "depth-increment"
9818 Now, what happens if we nest an
9822 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9823 label be? An asterisk?
9827 \begin_layout Itemize
9837 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9838 So, its label is a bullet.
9839 (We got here by using
9842 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9848 arg "depth-increment"
9851 , then changing the environment to
9859 \begin_layout Itemize
9860 Here's level #4, produced using
9863 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9869 arg "depth-increment"
9873 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9878 \begin_layout Enumerate
9881 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9886 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9890 , because we are in the
9898 environment (that is, it is an
9913 \begin_layout Enumerate
9918 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9919 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9923 \begin_layout Enumerate
9924 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9927 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9930 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9933 \begin_layout Enumerate
9937 arg "depth-decrement"
9940 to decrease the depth after the next
9943 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9950 \begin_layout Enumerate
9952 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9957 \begin_layout Enumerate
9959 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9960 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9964 \begin_layout Enumerate
9965 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9974 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9979 reset the counter for the label.
9983 \begin_layout Enumerate
9987 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9993 arg "depth-decrement"
9996 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9997 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9998 into the twofold-nested
10006 \begin_layout Enumerate
10007 The same thing happens if we do another
10010 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10016 arg "depth-decrement"
10019 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10022 \begin_layout Standard
10023 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10028 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10039 The number of other
10043 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10050 The same rule applies for the
10054 environment, as well.
10057 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10058 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10061 \begin_layout Enumerate
10062 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10063 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10064 the same detail with how we did it.
10073 \begin_layout Standard
10081 arg "depth-increment"
10088 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10089 the example in parentheses someplace.
10090 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10091 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10092 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10096 \begin_layout Enumerate
10101 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10105 \begin_layout Verse
10106 Now we will add verse.
10107 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 It will get much worse.
10111 \begin_inset Newline newline
10121 arg "depth-increment"
10131 \begin_layout Verse
10132 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10133 \begin_inset Newline newline
10136 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10137 \begin_inset Newline newline
10143 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10151 \begin_layout Verse
10152 Here comes a table:
10156 \begin_layout Standard
10157 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10163 \begin_layout Standard
10165 \begin_inset Tabular
10166 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10167 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10168 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10169 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10254 \begin_layout Verse
10258 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10268 arg "depth-increment"
10274 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10280 \begin_inset Newline newline
10288 arg "depth-decrement"
10295 \begin_layout Enumerate
10300 : level #1) This is another item.
10301 Note that selecting a
10305 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10306 3 times to put the table inside the
10314 \begin_layout Quotation
10315 We're now ending the
10319 list and changing to
10324 We're still at level #1.
10325 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10326 The next set of paragraphs is a
10327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10334 We will nest both the
10341 \begin_inset space ~
10346 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10350 for the letter body.
10354 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10357 to preserve the depth.
10358 Remember that you need to use
10361 arg "newline-insert newline"
10364 to create multiple lines inside the
10371 \begin_inset space ~
10381 \begin_layout Right Address
10383 \begin_inset Newline newline
10386 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10387 \begin_inset Newline newline
10393 \begin_layout Address
10395 \begin_inset space ~
10401 \begin_layout Quotation
10402 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10406 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10407 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10408 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10409 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10410 as soon as possible.
10411 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10414 \begin_layout Quotation
10415 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10416 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10417 with your order, along with payment.
10420 \begin_layout Quotation
10421 We thank you again for your patience.
10424 \begin_layout Address
10426 \begin_inset Newline newline
10433 \begin_layout Quotation
10434 That ends that example!
10437 \begin_layout Standard
10438 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10439 gives you a lot of power with just
10441 We could have easily nested an
10462 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10465 \begin_layout Subsection
10467 \begin_inset Index idx
10470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10471 Nesting ! Separation
10477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10479 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10486 \begin_layout Standard
10487 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10489 For example you need two different enumerations:
10492 \begin_layout Enumerate
10497 \begin_layout Enumerate
10502 \begin_layout Enumerate
10506 \begin_layout Standard
10507 \begin_inset Separator plain
10513 \begin_layout Itemize
10519 \begin_layout Standard
10520 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10526 \begin_layout Enumerate
10530 \begin_layout Enumerate
10534 \begin_layout Enumerate
10538 \begin_layout Standard
10539 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10540 list item and use the menu
10542 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10543 Separated <Name> Above
10547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10548 Separated <Name> Below
10551 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10552 ) and before or behind it the
10554 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10557 \begin_layout Standard
10558 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10559 (red arrow in LyX).
10560 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10561 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10564 \begin_layout Standard
10565 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10568 arg "paragraph-break"
10575 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10578 \begin_layout Section
10579 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10580 \begin_inset Index idx
10583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10592 \begin_layout Standard
10593 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10594 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10596 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10597 be broken at the end of a line.
10598 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10602 \begin_layout Subsection
10604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10606 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10611 \begin_inset Index idx
10614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10623 \begin_layout Standard
10624 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10625 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10626 ) not to break the line at
10628 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10631 \begin_layout Quote
10632 Further documentation is given in section
10633 \begin_inset Newline newline
10637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10639 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10647 \begin_layout Standard
10648 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10663 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10672 A protected space is set with
10674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10675 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10677 \begin_inset space ~
10685 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10691 \begin_layout Subsection
10693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10695 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10700 \begin_inset Index idx
10703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10704 Spacing ! Horizontal
10712 \begin_layout Standard
10713 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10715 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10716 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10720 The length units are listed in Appendix
10721 \begin_inset space ~
10725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10727 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10738 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10743 \begin_inset Index idx
10746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10747 Spaces ! Inter-word
10755 \begin_layout Standard
10756 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10757 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10758 at the ends of sentences.
10759 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10760 automatically takes care about this.
10761 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10762 followed by a period; see section
10763 \begin_inset space ~
10767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10769 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10774 To insert a normal space, select
10776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10777 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10779 \begin_inset space ~
10787 arg "space-insert normal"
10793 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10797 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10802 \begin_inset Index idx
10805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10814 \begin_layout Standard
10816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10823 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10832 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10833 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10834 inside abbreviations:
10837 \begin_layout Quote
10839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10843 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10846 \begin_layout Standard
10847 or between values and units.
10848 Compare for example this:
10849 \begin_inset Newline newline
10853 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10857 \begin_inset Newline newline
10860 10 kg (normal space
10863 \begin_layout Standard
10864 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10866 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10867 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10869 \begin_inset space ~
10877 arg "space-insert thin"
10883 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10887 \begin_layout Standard
10888 You can also insert the following space types:
10891 \begin_layout Description
10893 \begin_inset space ~
10897 \begin_inset space ~
10900 space A line with a
10901 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10905 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10909 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10912 negative thin space between the arrows.
10915 \begin_layout Description
10917 \begin_inset space ~
10921 \begin_inset space ~
10924 space A line with a
10925 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10929 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10933 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10936 negative medium space between the arrows.
10939 \begin_layout Description
10941 \begin_inset space ~
10945 \begin_inset space ~
10948 space A line with a
10949 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10953 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10957 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10960 negative thick space between the arrows.
10963 \begin_layout Description
10965 \begin_inset space ~
10969 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10973 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10977 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10981 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10985 \begin_inset space ~
10989 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10992 em) space between the arrows.
10995 \begin_layout Description
10997 \begin_inset space ~
11001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11005 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11009 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11013 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11017 \begin_inset space ~
11021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11024 em) space between the arrows.
11027 \begin_layout Description
11029 \begin_inset space ~
11033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11037 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11041 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11045 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11049 \begin_inset space ~
11053 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11056 em) space between the arrows.
11059 \begin_layout Description
11061 \begin_inset space ~
11065 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11069 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11074 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11081 cm space between the arrows.
11084 \begin_layout Standard
11086 \begin_inset space ~
11090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11092 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11096 lists the different space sizes.
11099 \begin_layout Standard
11100 \begin_inset Float table
11105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11106 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11111 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11115 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11125 \begin_inset Tabular
11126 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11127 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11128 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11129 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11169 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11193 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11245 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11249 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11273 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11381 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11402 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11404 \begin_inset Index idx
11407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11416 \begin_layout Standard
11417 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11418 feature for adding extra space
11419 in a uniform fashion.
11420 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11421 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11422 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11423 equally between themselves.
11426 \begin_layout Standard
11427 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11430 \begin_layout Quote
11432 This is on the left side
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 This is on the right
11439 \begin_layout Quote
11442 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11446 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_layout Quote
11455 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11463 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11469 \begin_layout Standard
11470 That was an example in the
11476 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11480 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11484 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11487 is one in a standard paragraph.
11488 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11492 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11495 \begin_layout Standard
11496 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11499 \begin_inset space ~
11504 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11507 \begin_layout Standard
11509 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11513 \begin_inset space ~
11519 \begin_layout Standard
11521 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11525 \begin_inset space ~
11531 \begin_layout Standard
11533 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11537 \begin_inset space ~
11543 \begin_layout Standard
11545 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11549 \begin_inset space ~
11555 \begin_layout Standard
11557 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11561 \begin_inset space ~
11567 \begin_layout Standard
11569 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11573 \begin_inset space ~
11579 \begin_layout Standard
11580 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11588 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11592 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11594 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11595 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11599 option in the space dialog.
11607 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11611 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11616 \begin_inset Index idx
11619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11628 \begin_layout Standard
11629 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11630 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11633 \begin_layout Standard
11634 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11637 What is correct English?:
11638 \begin_inset Newline newline
11642 \begin_inset Newline newline
11646 \begin_inset space ~
11649 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11650 \begin_inset Newline newline
11654 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11665 \begin_inset Newline newline
11669 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11680 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11686 \begin_layout Standard
11688 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11693 \begin_inset space ~
11697 \begin_inset space ~
11701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11705 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11707 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11708 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11712 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11718 \begin_inset space ~
11722 \begin_inset space ~
11726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11729 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11738 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11739 That is why it is named
11740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11748 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11749 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11753 \begin_layout Subsection
11755 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11757 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11762 \begin_inset Index idx
11765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11774 \begin_layout Standard
11775 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11778 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11780 \begin_inset space ~
11786 There you find the following sizes:
11789 \begin_layout Standard
11802 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11803 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11808 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11811 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11813 \begin_inset space ~
11819 \begin_inset Index idx
11822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11823 Document ! Settings
11828 for the paragraph separation.
11829 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11840 \begin_layout Standard
11846 \begin_inset Index idx
11849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11855 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11856 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11861 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11862 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11871 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11880 s are described in section
11881 \begin_inset space ~
11885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11887 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11896 If there are several
11900 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11901 You can therefore use
11905 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11908 \begin_layout Standard
11913 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11914 \begin_inset space ~
11918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11920 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11927 \begin_layout Standard
11928 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11938 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11939 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11951 \begin_layout Subsection
11952 Paragraph Alignment
11953 \begin_inset Index idx
11956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11957 Paragraph ! Alignment
11965 \begin_layout Standard
11966 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11968 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11971 dialog (toolbar button
11974 arg "layout-paragraph"
11978 There are five possibilities:
11981 \begin_layout Itemize
11989 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11995 \begin_layout Itemize
12003 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12009 \begin_layout Itemize
12017 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12023 \begin_layout Itemize
12031 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12037 \begin_layout Itemize
12045 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12051 \begin_layout Standard
12052 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12053 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12054 the left and right margins.
12055 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 This paragraph is right aligned,
12063 \begin_layout Standard
12065 this one is centered,
12068 \begin_layout Standard
12070 this one is left aligned.
12073 \begin_layout Subsection
12075 \begin_inset Index idx
12078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12079 Page breaks ! Forced
12085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12087 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12094 \begin_layout Standard
12095 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12096 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12097 force a page break where you want one.
12098 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12099 is good at page breaking.
12100 Only if you use a lot of
12104 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12105 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12108 \begin_layout Standard
12109 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12110 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12114 have to change the page breaking.
12117 \begin_layout Standard
12118 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12120 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12122 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12123 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12125 \begin_inset space ~
12131 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12134 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12136 \begin_inset space ~
12141 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12143 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12144 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12147 \begin_layout Standard
12148 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12149 at the top of a page.
12150 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12152 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12153 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12154 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12158 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12162 to learn more about
12169 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12173 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12178 \begin_inset Index idx
12181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12182 Page breaks ! Clear
12190 \begin_layout Standard
12191 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12192 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12193 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12194 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12195 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12198 \begin_layout Standard
12199 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12202 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12204 \begin_inset space ~
12210 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12212 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12213 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12215 \begin_inset space ~
12219 \begin_inset space ~
12224 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12225 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12228 \begin_layout Subsection
12230 \begin_inset Index idx
12233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12242 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12249 \begin_layout Standard
12250 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12252 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12255 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12257 \begin_inset space ~
12261 \begin_inset space ~
12269 arg "newline-insert newline"
12273 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12276 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12282 \begin_inset space ~
12290 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12293 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12295 This is useful to avoid
12296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12303 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12306 \begin_layout Standard
12307 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12308 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12310 very good at line breaking.
12311 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12312 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12313 \begin_inset space ~
12317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12319 reference "sec:Quote"
12324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12326 reference "sec:Verse"
12331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12333 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12340 \begin_layout Subsection
12342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12344 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12349 \begin_inset Index idx
12352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12361 \begin_layout Standard
12363 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12374 \begin_layout Standard
12378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12379 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12381 \begin_inset space ~
12386 you can insert horizontal lines.
12387 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12388 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12389 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12392 \begin_layout Standard
12394 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12405 \begin_layout Section
12406 Characters and Symbols
12409 \begin_layout Standard
12410 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12411 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12412 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12420 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12424 for information on how this is done.
12427 \begin_layout Standard
12428 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12433 dialog via the menu
12435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12436 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12442 \begin_layout Standard
12443 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12451 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12452 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12454 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12462 \begin_layout Section
12463 Fonts and Text Styles
12464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12466 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12473 \begin_layout Subsection
12475 \begin_inset Index idx
12478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12487 \begin_layout Standard
12488 There are two types of fonts:
12491 \begin_layout Description
12493 \begin_inset space ~
12497 \begin_inset Index idx
12500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12506 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12507 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12511 characters) in the font.
12512 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12513 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12514 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12515 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12516 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12517 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12518 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12519 \begin_inset Newline newline
12522 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12523 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12524 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12525 sizes than at small ones.
12526 \begin_inset Newline newline
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12548 \begin_layout Description
12550 \begin_inset space ~
12554 \begin_inset Index idx
12557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12563 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12564 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12565 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12566 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12567 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12568 image manipulation program.
12569 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12570 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12571 \begin_inset space ~
12574 pixels high up to 34
12575 \begin_inset space ~
12578 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12579 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12580 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12582 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12583 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12584 \begin_inset Newline newline
12587 Bitmap fonts are named
12590 \begin_inset space ~
12595 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12598 \begin_layout Standard
12599 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12600 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12601 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12602 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12603 use scalable fonts.
12606 \begin_layout Standard
12607 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12610 \begin_layout Standard
12611 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12613 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12615 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12618 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12619 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12620 font to emphasize text, you use an
12621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12629 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12631 In \SpecialChar LyX
12632 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12636 \begin_layout Subsection
12639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12641 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12648 \begin_layout Standard
12649 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12650 used its own fonts.
12651 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12652 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12655 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12656 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12657 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12658 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12659 to a word processor.
12660 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12661 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12662 files are very portable across
12663 different machines.
12664 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12665 has increased a lot
12666 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12669 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12671 \begin_inset space ~
12675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12677 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12682 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12683 code in the document
12684 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12687 \begin_layout Standard
12688 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12689 engines that are also able directly
12690 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12692 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12694 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12696 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12697 that is installed on your system.
12698 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12701 \begin_layout Standard
12702 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12710 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12711 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12719 \begin_layout Subsection
12720 Document Font and Font size
12721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12723 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12728 \begin_inset Index idx
12731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12738 \begin_inset Index idx
12741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12750 \begin_layout Standard
12751 You can set the document fonts in the
12753 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12757 \begin_inset Index idx
12760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12761 Document ! Settings
12771 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12772 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12775 \begin_inset space ~
12784 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12786 \begin_inset space ~
12789 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12792 \begin_layout Standard
12797 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12798 This requires that you use
12810 as the output format, i.
12811 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12815 \begin_inset space \space{}
12818 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12819 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12820 installed (see section
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12827 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12832 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12834 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12835 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12837 \begin_inset space ~
12840 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12841 cannot determine the family.
12842 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12843 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12846 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12849 \begin_layout Standard
12850 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12851 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12856 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12862 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12864 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12866 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12869 font encoding, this is
12870 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12871 , depending on the document language,
12874 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12875 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12883 \begin_inset space ~
12889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12899 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12900 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12908 \begin_inset space ~
12914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12922 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
12926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12943 European Computer Modern
12946 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12954 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12957 \begin_layout Standard
12962 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12963 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12968 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12976 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12982 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12983 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12986 \begin_layout Itemize
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12995 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13013 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13014 community in order to replace
13018 as the default font.
13019 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13020 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13023 \begin_inset space ~
13036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13037 One difference is improved kerning.
13045 \begin_layout Itemize
13046 If you do not like the look of
13054 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13055 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13059 \begin_inset space ~
13065 \begin_inset space ~
13075 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13076 \begin_inset space ~
13079 serif and typewriter fonts,
13083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13084 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13085 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13091 \begin_inset space ~
13100 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13105 \begin_inset space \space{}
13113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13117 \begin_inset space \space{}
13123 \begin_inset space ~
13131 \begin_inset space ~
13141 but you can also select your own.
13142 \begin_inset Newline newline
13145 The differences between roman,
13148 \begin_inset space ~
13157 fonts are explained in section
13158 \begin_inset space ~
13162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13164 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13169 \begin_inset Newline newline
13175 \begin_inset space ~
13180 was originally designed for newspapers.
13181 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13182 into the small newspaper columns.
13186 \begin_inset space ~
13191 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13194 \begin_layout Standard
13195 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13208 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13213 depends on the class you are using.
13214 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13217 \begin_layout Standard
13218 Note that the font size is the
13223 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13224 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13225 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13226 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13229 \begin_inset space ~
13235 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13242 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13249 \begin_layout Standard
13253 \begin_inset space ~
13258 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13260 \begin_inset space ~
13263 serif or typewriter.
13268 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13278 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13281 \begin_layout Standard
13286 LaTeX font encoding
13288 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13289 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13295 \begin_inset Index idx
13298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13306 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13308 \begin_inset space ~
13312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13314 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13321 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13322 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13323 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13327 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13335 \begin_layout Standard
13336 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13338 Use Old Style Figures
13342 Use True Small Caps
13345 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13348 Use Old Style Figures
13350 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13352 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13353 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13360 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13364 Use True Small Caps
13366 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13367 of scaled capitals.
13368 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13369 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13372 \begin_layout Standard
13377 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13378 a font to display the script characters.
13382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13383 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13389 \begin_inset Index idx
13392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13399 So this has no effect for the document language
13415 \begin_layout Standard
13418 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13420 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13421 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13427 \begin_inset Index idx
13430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13432 packages ! microtype
13441 \begin_layout Standard
13444 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13446 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13451 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13452 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13458 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13459 \begin_inset space ~
13463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13465 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13475 \begin_layout Standard
13476 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13480 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13488 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13493 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13494 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13496 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13498 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13501 dialog, see section
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13508 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13520 \begin_layout Subsection
13524 \begin_layout Standard
13525 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13526 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13528 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13529 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13530 choose a math font in the dialog
13532 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13536 \begin_inset Index idx
13539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13540 Document ! Settings
13546 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13547 automatically selects a math font.
13548 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13549 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13558 \begin_inset space ~
13564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13569 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13570 document font is available.
13573 \begin_layout Standard
13574 Note that the math font will not be used for
13578 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13584 or by the insertion of the command
13591 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13592 \begin_inset space ~
13596 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13597 while the math characters do not.
13599 \begin_inset space ~
13602 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13605 \begin_inset space ~
13613 \begin_inset space ~
13618 in the document font settings.
13621 \begin_layout Standard
13622 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13623 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13624 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13625 font (in most cases
13626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13632 \begin_inset space ~
13638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13641 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13642 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13650 \begin_inset space ~
13656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13662 \begin_layout Subsection
13664 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13666 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13672 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13674 name "subsec:charstyles"
13681 \begin_inset Index idx
13684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13691 \begin_inset Index idx
13694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13703 \begin_layout Standard
13704 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13705 automatically changes the
13706 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13709 style for certain paragraph environments.
13711 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13712 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13714 This is where we meet the concept of
13720 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13722 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13726 \begin_layout Standard
13728 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13733 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13735 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13748 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13757 e., available with all document classes.
13758 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13762 for specific purposes.
13763 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13766 \begin_layout Standard
13768 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13769 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13779 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13783 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13796 — you customized the
13801 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13802 among them, encourage the use of
13814 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13815 \begin_inset space ~
13819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13821 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13826 Rather than fiddling with
13830 , they encourage the use of
13834 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13839 \begin_inset Quotes els
13843 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13846 ), not their form (
13847 \begin_inset Quotes els
13851 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13855 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13856 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13857 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13858 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13859 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13860 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13866 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13870 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13871 With a semantic markup (such as
13875 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13880 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13882 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13883 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13886 \begin_layout Standard
13888 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13889 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13890 by \SpecialChar LyX
13896 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13898 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13899 Builtin Text Styles
13900 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13902 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13909 \begin_layout Standard
13911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
13912 The two builtin text styles can be
13913 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
13917 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
13921 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
13922 both of these styles
13925 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
13933 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
13939 \begin_layout Standard
13944 style, do one of the following:
13947 \begin_layout Itemize
13948 click on the toolbar button
13957 \begin_layout Itemize
13958 use the key binding
13965 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
13969 \begin_layout Itemize
13971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
13979 arg "dialog-show character"
13985 arg "dialog-show character"
13988 ) as described in section
13989 \begin_inset space ~
13993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13995 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14004 \begin_layout Standard
14005 These commands are all toggles.
14010 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14013 \begin_layout Standard
14014 One typically uses the
14018 style for proper names.
14020 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14027 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14033 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14037 \begin_layout Standard
14039 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14044 is producing text in
14048 , but the definition can be changed.
14053 \begin_layout Standard
14055 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14057 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14065 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14072 \begin_layout Itemize
14073 clicking on the toolbar button
14082 \begin_layout Itemize
14083 using the keybindings
14090 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14094 \begin_layout Itemize
14096 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14104 arg "dialog-show character"
14110 arg "dialog-show character"
14113 ) as described in section
14114 \begin_inset space ~
14118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14120 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14129 \begin_layout Standard
14134 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14136 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14138 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14141 packages use a different font
14142 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14143 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14149 \begin_layout Standard
14150 We've been using the
14154 style all over the place in this document.
14155 Here's one more example:
14158 \begin_layout Quotation
14162 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14164 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14170 \begin_layout Standard
14171 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14172 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14173 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14174 the common tendency to overuse
14175 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14177 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14182 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14186 \begin_layout Standard
14188 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14189 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14190 only as font changes and integrated in the
14198 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14201 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14208 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14210 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14214 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14217 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14219 \begin_inset space ~
14222 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14224 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14230 arg "dialog-show character"
14236 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14238 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14244 arg "dialog-show character"
14248 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14252 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14254 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14256 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14258 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14265 \begin_layout Standard
14267 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14268 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14270 \begin_inset space ~
14274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14276 reference "subsec:Modules"
14283 ), or local layout settings (see section
14284 \begin_inset space ~
14288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14290 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14295 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14299 markup for specific functions.
14300 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14305 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14315 \begin_inset Quotes els
14319 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14325 \begin_layout Standard
14327 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14328 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14330 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14336 \begin_layout Standard
14338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14339 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14344 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14345 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14346 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14351 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14352 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14365 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14366 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14367 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14368 \begin_inset Flex Code
14371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14373 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14382 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14387 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14396 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14401 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14410 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14411 on screen their formal appearance.
14416 \begin_layout Subsection
14418 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14420 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14424 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14430 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14432 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14438 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14440 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14446 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14451 \begin_inset Index idx
14454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14463 \begin_layout Standard
14464 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14465 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14468 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14470 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14472 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14477 the properties of text passages
14478 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14482 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14483 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14484 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14485 from ordinary dialog.
14486 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14490 \begin_layout Standard
14492 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14493 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14494 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14495 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14496 the properties of the respective text passages.
14501 comes in as a last resort.
14506 \begin_layout Standard
14507 Before we document how to
14508 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14509 use custom character style
14510 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14511 tweak the text properties
14513 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14514 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14516 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14520 \begin_inset Newline newline
14523 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14524 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14527 \begin_layout Standard
14529 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14530 use custom character styles
14531 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14532 tweak text properties
14535 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14540 \begin_inset space ~
14543 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14545 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14551 arg "dialog-show character"
14556 dialog or press the toolbar button
14559 arg "dialog-show character"
14564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14567 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14568 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14570 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14573 property that you can choose.
14574 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14577 \begin_inset space ~
14582 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14584 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14588 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14595 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14596 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14597 environments all at once.
14600 \begin_layout Standard
14602 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14604 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14607 properties, and their options (in addition to
14610 \begin_inset space ~
14616 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14620 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14628 \begin_layout Labeling
14629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14643 The possible options are:
14647 \begin_layout Labeling
14648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14653 This is the Roman font family.
14654 Normally a serif font.
14655 It's also the default family.
14665 \begin_layout Labeling
14666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14670 \begin_inset space ~
14677 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14689 \begin_layout Labeling
14690 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14697 This is the Typewriter font family.
14703 arg "font-typewriter"
14709 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14713 \begin_layout Standard
14715 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14716 The general differences of these families are:
14719 \begin_layout Itemize
14721 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14726 fonts use characters with serifs.
14727 These are the small
14728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14735 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14736 The following example shows the difference:
14737 \begin_inset Newline newline
14741 \begin_inset Newline newline
14746 text without serifs
14749 \begin_inset Newline newline
14752 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14753 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14760 \begin_layout Itemize
14762 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14767 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14768 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14769 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14772 \begin_layout Itemize
14774 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14787 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14805 \begin_inset Newline newline
14809 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14814 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14825 \begin_inset Note Note
14828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14830 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14831 For more on phantoms see section
14832 \begin_inset space ~
14836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14838 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14848 \begin_inset Newline newline
14857 \begin_layout Labeling
14858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14863 This corresponds to the print weight.
14868 \begin_layout Labeling
14869 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14874 This is the Medium font series.
14875 It's also the default series.
14878 \begin_layout Labeling
14879 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14886 This is the Bold font series.
14899 \begin_layout Labeling
14900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14905 As the name implies.
14910 \begin_layout Labeling
14911 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14916 This is the Upright font shape.
14917 It's also the default shape.
14920 \begin_layout Labeling
14921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14931 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
14936 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
14941 s the Italic font shape
14947 \begin_layout Labeling
14948 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14955 This is the Slanted font shape
14957 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14958 , this is different from italic).
14961 \begin_layout Labeling
14962 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14966 \begin_inset space ~
14973 This is the Small caps font shape
14980 \begin_layout Labeling
14981 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14986 Alters the text color.
14987 Note that not all DVI
14988 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
14990 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
14993 viewers are able to display colors.
14995 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
14999 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15001 \begin_inset space ~
15008 , which means that the document default color set in
15010 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15011 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15017 \begin_inset space ~
15023 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15025 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15029 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15109 \begin_inset Index idx
15112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15121 \begin_layout Labeling
15122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15127 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15128 the language of the document.
15129 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15130 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15131 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15134 in blue to indicate the change
15135 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15136 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15140 \begin_inset Newline newline
15143 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15145 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15146 When using the spell checking (see section
15147 \begin_inset space ~
15151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15153 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15157 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15158 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15160 \begin_inset Newline newline
15163 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15165 Exclude from Spellchecking
15168 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15171 \begin_layout Labeling
15172 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15177 Alters the size of the font.
15179 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15181 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15185 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15188 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15189 document font size.
15190 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15191 the details, but a general description of what
15197 \begin_layout Labeling
15198 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15219 arg "font-size tiny"
15225 \begin_layout Labeling
15226 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15247 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15253 \begin_layout Labeling
15254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15266 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15275 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15281 \begin_layout Labeling
15282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15303 arg "font-size small"
15309 \begin_layout Labeling
15310 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15324 It's also the default size.
15328 arg "font-size normal"
15334 \begin_layout Labeling
15335 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15356 arg "font-size large"
15362 \begin_layout Labeling
15363 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15384 arg "font-size larger"
15390 \begin_layout Labeling
15391 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15412 arg "font-size largest"
15418 \begin_layout Labeling
15419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15440 arg "font-size huge"
15446 \begin_layout Labeling
15447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15468 arg "font-size giant"
15474 \begin_layout Labeling
15475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15480 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15500 arg "font-size increase"
15506 \begin_layout Labeling
15507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15512 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15532 arg "font-size decrease"
15539 \begin_layout Standard
15544 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15545 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15547 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15548 — use those instead.
15549 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15552 \begin_layout Labeling
15553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15555 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15559 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15565 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15566 change a few other things at the character level
15567 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15568 have text passages being underlined
15572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15573 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15574 days, when you could not change fonts.
15575 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15576 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15577 because some people
15581 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15588 \begin_layout Labeling
15589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15591 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15598 This is text with emphasize on
15601 This might seem like the same as
15605 , but it is actually a bit different.
15611 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15613 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15614 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15618 \begin_layout Labeling
15619 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15621 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15626 Don't use underlining.
15631 \begin_layout Labeling
15632 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15634 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15638 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15646 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15648 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15657 arg "font-underline"
15663 \begin_inset Newline newline
15667 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15670 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15671 when you could not change fonts.
15672 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15673 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15674 because some people
15678 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15683 \begin_layout Labeling
15684 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15688 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15690 \begin_inset space ~
15699 This is text with Double under
15700 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15702 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15711 arg "font-underunderline"
15715 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15717 \begin_inset Newline newline
15720 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15721 about double underbar
15726 \begin_layout Labeling
15727 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15731 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15733 \begin_inset space ~
15742 This is text with Wavy under
15743 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15745 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15754 arg "font-underwave"
15758 \begin_inset Newline newline
15761 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15762 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15763 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15768 \begin_layout Labeling
15769 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15771 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15776 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15782 \begin_layout Labeling
15783 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15785 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15790 Don't use strikethrough.
15793 \begin_layout Labeling
15794 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15800 \begin_inset space ~
15804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15812 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15814 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15815 Single strikethrough
15823 arg "font-strikeout"
15827 \begin_inset Newline newline
15830 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15831 changed in the meantime.
15834 \begin_layout Labeling
15835 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15837 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15841 \begin_inset space ~
15845 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15847 \begin_inset space ~
15851 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15859 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15861 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15867 \begin_inset Newline newline
15870 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15874 \begin_layout Standard
15876 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15877 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15878 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15879 \begin_inset space ~
15883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15885 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15892 \begin_layout Itemize
15894 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15901 This is text with emphasize on
15906 \begin_layout Itemize
15910 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
15917 This is text with Noun on.
15919 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
15926 , this is a logical attribute.
15927 Normally it's equivalent to
15930 \begin_inset space ~
15940 \begin_layout Standard
15941 So you have a huge number of combinations to
15942 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
15944 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
15949 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
15950 chosen a new character style
15951 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
15952 applied a text property
15955 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
15958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15960 \begin_inset space ~
15963 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15965 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
15971 arg "dialog-show character"
15979 arg "dialog-show character"
15982 ) dialog, the settings are
15983 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
15987 You can activate the
15988 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
15990 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
15991 last applied properties
15993 by using the toolbar button
15996 arg "textstyle-apply"
16000 The button lets you apply
16001 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16002 your custom character style
16003 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16006 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16009 \begin_layout Standard
16010 To completely reset the
16011 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16013 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16014 text properties of a selection
16016 to the default, use
16024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16025 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16026 you just set the shape to
16027 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16045 \begin_inset space ~
16059 \begin_layout Standard
16061 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16062 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16070 \begin_inset space ~
16082 \begin_layout Itemize
16084 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16090 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16097 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16115 \begin_inset Newline newline
16119 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16133 \begin_inset Note Note
16136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16137 For more on phantoms see section
16138 \begin_inset space ~
16142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16144 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16154 \begin_inset Newline newline
16160 \begin_layout Itemize
16162 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16167 fonts use characters with serifs.
16168 These are the small
16169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16176 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16177 The following example shows the difference:
16178 \begin_inset Newline newline
16182 \begin_inset Newline newline
16187 text without serifs
16190 \begin_inset Newline newline
16193 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16194 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16201 \begin_layout Itemize
16203 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16208 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16209 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16210 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16215 \begin_layout Standard
16217 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16225 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16226 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16229 \begin_inset space ~
16234 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16235 the property to be removed.
16236 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16237 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16238 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16256 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16257 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16258 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16265 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16269 \begin_inset space ~
16274 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16285 If you, for example, set
16286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16304 \begin_inset space ~
16309 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16318 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16323 \begin_layout Standard
16325 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16328 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16329 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16332 \begin_layout Section
16333 Printing and Previewing
16336 \begin_layout Subsection
16340 \begin_layout Standard
16341 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16342 using \SpecialChar LyX
16343 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16344 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16345 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16346 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16348 Additional Features
16353 \begin_layout Standard
16355 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16358 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16359 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16360 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16363 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16364 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16365 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16366 to turn your writing into printable output.
16367 This happens in two stages:
16370 \begin_layout Enumerate
16371 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16372 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16374 a file with the extension,
16375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16389 \begin_layout Enumerate
16390 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16391 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16392 to use the commands in the
16396 file to produce printable output.
16399 \begin_layout Subsection
16400 Output file formats
16401 \begin_inset Index idx
16404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16413 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16421 Simple text (ASCII)
16422 \begin_inset Index idx
16425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16426 File formats ! ASCII
16434 \begin_layout Standard
16435 This file type has the extension
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16448 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16452 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16459 \begin_layout Standard
16460 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16462 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16463 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16465 \begin_inset space ~
16471 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16472 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16473 bibliography (section
16474 \begin_inset space ~
16478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16480 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16485 If your document includes such material, use
16487 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16488 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16490 \begin_inset space ~
16494 \begin_inset space ~
16498 \begin_inset space ~
16506 \begin_inset space ~
16510 \begin_inset space ~
16516 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16517 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16520 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16523 \begin_inset Index idx
16526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16527 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16536 \begin_layout Standard
16537 This file type has the extension
16538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16549 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16552 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16553 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16554 -Errors or to process it manually
16555 with console commands.
16556 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16557 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16558 's temporary directory whenever you
16559 view or export your document.
16562 \begin_layout Standard
16563 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16564 -file using the menu
16566 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16567 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16571 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16572 export variants are explained in section
16573 \begin_inset space ~
16577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16579 reference "subsec:Export"
16586 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16588 \begin_inset Index idx
16591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16600 \begin_layout Standard
16601 This file type has the extension
16602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16622 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16623 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16624 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16628 \begin_layout Standard
16629 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16630 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16631 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16632 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16633 when you view the DVI.
16634 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16637 \begin_layout Standard
16638 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16640 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16641 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16646 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16647 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16649 \begin_inset space ~
16655 The latter option uses the program
16657 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16663 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16666 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16667 font access (see section
16668 \begin_inset space ~
16672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16674 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16679 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16680 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16685 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16687 \begin_inset Index idx
16690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16691 File formats ! PostScript
16699 \begin_layout Standard
16700 This file type has the extension
16701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16713 PostScript was developed by the company
16717 as a printer language.
16718 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16720 PostScript can be seen as a
16721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16724 programming language
16725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16728 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16733 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16740 \begin_inset Index idx
16743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16745 packages ! pstricks
16755 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16758 \begin_layout Standard
16759 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16763 Encapsulated PostScript
16764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16767 (EPS, file extension
16768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16780 As \SpecialChar LyX
16781 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16782 convert them in the background to EPS.
16783 If, for example, you have 50
16784 \begin_inset space ~
16787 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16789 \begin_inset space ~
16792 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16793 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16795 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16796 EPS to avoid this problem.
16799 \begin_layout Standard
16800 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16802 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16803 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16809 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16811 \begin_inset Index idx
16814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16821 \begin_inset Index idx
16824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16833 \begin_layout Standard
16834 This file type has the extension
16835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16851 Portable Document Format
16852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16859 was derived from PostScript.
16860 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16869 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16870 looks exactly the same.
16873 \begin_layout Standard
16874 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16878 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16882 (JPG, file extension
16883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16910 Portable Network Graphics
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16914 (PNG, file extension
16915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16927 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16928 converts them in the
16929 background to one of these formats.
16930 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16931 will slow down your workflow.
16932 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16935 \begin_layout Standard
16936 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
16938 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16944 \begin_layout Description
16946 \begin_inset space ~
16949 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16953 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16956 \begin_layout Description
16958 \begin_inset space ~
16965 ) This uses the program
16967 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16970 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16973 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16976 is a new engine, derived from
16980 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
16981 access (see section
16982 \begin_inset space ~
16986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16988 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16993 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16994 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16999 \begin_layout Description
17001 \begin_inset space ~
17008 ) This uses the program
17013 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17019 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17020 font access (see section
17021 \begin_inset space ~
17025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17027 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17032 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17033 vertically written Japanese.
17036 \begin_layout Description
17038 \begin_inset space ~
17041 (cropped) This is the same as
17044 \begin_inset space ~
17049 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17050 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17051 to generate good-looking
17052 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17055 \begin_layout Description
17057 \begin_inset space ~
17060 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17064 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17068 \begin_layout Description
17070 \begin_inset space ~
17073 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17077 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17078 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17082 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17083 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17086 \begin_layout Standard
17090 \begin_inset space ~
17099 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17100 works without problems.
17101 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17102 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17106 \begin_inset space ~
17114 \begin_inset space ~
17119 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17127 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17129 \begin_inset Index idx
17132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17133 FileFormats ! XHTML
17139 \begin_inset Index idx
17142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17151 \begin_layout Standard
17152 This file type has the extension
17153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17165 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17166 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17167 When \SpecialChar LyX
17168 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17169 suitable for the purpose.
17170 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17173 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17176 between different formats, which are described in section
17178 Math Output in XHTML
17183 \begin_inset space ~
17191 \begin_layout Standard
17192 XHTML output remains
17193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17200 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17201 features are supported yet.
17205 and the World Wide Web
17209 Additional Features
17211 manual, for more information.
17214 \begin_layout Standard
17215 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17217 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17218 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17224 \begin_layout Subsection
17226 \begin_inset Index idx
17229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17238 \begin_layout Standard
17239 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17240 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17249 or use the toolbar button
17256 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17257 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17258 \begin_inset space ~
17262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17264 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17268 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17270 \begin_inset space ~
17274 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17276 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17281 Further output formats can be selected via
17283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17284 View (Other Formats)
17286 or the toolbar button
17295 \begin_layout Standard
17296 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17297 viewer window using the menu
17299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17304 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17305 Update (Other Formats)
17310 \begin_layout Standard
17311 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17314 To have a real output, export your document.
17317 \begin_layout Section
17318 A few Words about Typography
17319 \begin_inset Index idx
17322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17331 \begin_layout Subsection
17332 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17333 \begin_inset Index idx
17336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17343 \begin_inset Index idx
17346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17355 \begin_layout Standard
17356 In \SpecialChar LyX
17358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17369 symbol comes in four variants: the
17386 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17392 \begin_layout Standard
17393 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17403 height_special "totalheight"
17408 backgroundcolor "none"
17411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17412 \begin_inset Tabular
17413 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17414 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17415 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17416 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17417 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17418 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17419 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17447 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17448 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17487 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17488 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17510 system key combination
17514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17515 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17527 and the em dash with
17530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17543 is the Mac label for the right
17554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17567 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17568 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17590 system key combination or
17591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17605 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17618 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17657 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17663 \begin_layout Standard
17664 Dashes can also be inserted with
17666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17668 \begin_inset space ~
17671 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17679 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17680 and 2014 for the en dash).
17683 \begin_layout Standard
17684 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17685 mode and has a length of its own.
17686 Here are some examples:
17689 \begin_layout Enumerate
17690 line- and page-breaks
17691 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17701 \begin_layout Enumerate
17703 \begin_inset space ~
17707 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17717 \begin_layout Enumerate
17718 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17719 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17729 \begin_layout Enumerate
17730 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17734 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17744 \begin_layout Standard
17746 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17748 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17749 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17757 \begin_layout Subsection
17758 Dashes and Line Breaks
17759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17761 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17768 \begin_layout Standard
17769 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17770 case and locale, e.
17771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17777 \begin_layout Itemize
17778 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17779 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17782 \begin_layout Itemize
17783 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17787 \begin_layout Itemize
17788 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17789 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17792 \begin_layout Standard
17793 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17794 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17805 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17808 \begin_layout Enumerate
17809 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17810 \begin_inset space ~
17813 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17815 The Elements of Typographic Style
17818 \begin_inset space ~
17821 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17824 \begin_layout Enumerate
17825 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17832 Prevent Hyphenation
17837 \begin_inset space ~
17853 in \SpecialChar TeX
17859 \begin_layout Itemize
17861 \begin_inset space ~
17865 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17875 height_special "totalheight"
17880 backgroundcolor "none"
17883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17892 \begin_layout Itemize
17896 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17906 height_special "totalheight"
17911 backgroundcolor "none"
17914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17918 \begin_inset space ~
17926 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17927 \begin_inset space ~
17930 – sont très utiles.
17933 \begin_layout Itemize
17940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17949 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17953 \begin_layout Standard
17954 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17955 \begin_inset space ~
17958 – in contrast to an overfull line
17959 \begin_inset space ~
17962 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17966 \begin_layout Standard
17967 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
17970 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17971 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17972 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
17973 Disallow line breaks after dashes
17978 \begin_layout Enumerate
17979 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
17980 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
17981 or \SpecialChar TeX
17987 \begin_layout Itemize
17991 \begin_inset space ~
17994 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17995 \begin_inset space ~
17998 – sont très utiles.
18002 \begin_layout Enumerate
18003 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18004 \begin_inset Newline newline
18009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18010 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18011 Optional line break
18017 \begin_layout Itemize
18018 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18019 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18020 should be followed by
18021 a line break opportunity.
18024 \begin_layout Standard
18025 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18026 \begin_inset space ~
18030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18032 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18043 \begin_layout Enumerate
18044 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18045 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18046 or en dashes (see section
18047 \begin_inset space ~
18051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18053 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18063 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18064 Changes and backwards compatibility
18067 \begin_layout Standard
18068 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18070 \begin_inset space ~
18073 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18074 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18083 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18084 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18092 \begin_layout Standard
18093 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18095 \begin_inset space ~
18098 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18100 prevents ligation to dashes.
18102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18109 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18114 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18115 after the input (unless the current text font is
18123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18124 The behavior was changed since
18125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18137 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18140 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18141 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18142 as non-breakable dashes.
18143 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18152 \begin_layout Standard
18155 \begin_inset space ~
18163 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18165 \begin_inset space ~
18168 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18172 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18173 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18174 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18176 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18180 If you used both literal and
18181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18188 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18190 \begin_inset space ~
18193 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18194 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18197 \begin_layout Subsection
18199 \begin_inset Index idx
18202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18209 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18211 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18218 \begin_layout Standard
18219 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18220 but automatically in the output.
18221 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18227 \begin_inset Index idx
18230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18237 following the rules of the document language.
18239 does not hyphenate text in the
18243 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18246 \begin_layout Standard
18248 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18252 font and with unusual constructs, like
18253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18261 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18262 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18263 This is done with the menu
18265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18268 \begin_inset space ~
18274 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18276 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18280 \begin_layout Standard
18281 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18282 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18293 would then see the hyphen
18294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18301 as a line break possibility.
18302 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18303 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18307 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18310 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18312 Prevent Hyphenation
18317 \begin_inset space ~
18325 \begin_layout Subsection
18327 \begin_inset Index idx
18330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18340 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18343 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18350 \begin_layout Standard
18351 When \SpecialChar LyX
18352 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18353 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18355 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18361 appropriate amount of space.
18362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18365 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18367 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18368 gets after another word.
18371 \begin_layout Standard
18372 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18373 not work in all cases.
18375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18386 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18387 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18390 \begin_layout Standard
18391 Here are some examples of
18395 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18398 \begin_layout Itemize
18403 \begin_layout Itemize
18408 \begin_layout Standard
18409 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18412 \begin_layout Itemize
18414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18418 this is too much space!
18421 \begin_layout Itemize
18426 \begin_layout Standard
18427 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18430 \begin_layout Standard
18431 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18434 \begin_layout Enumerate
18438 \begin_inset space ~
18443 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18444 \begin_inset space ~
18448 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18450 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18455 \begin_inset Index idx
18458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18459 Spaces ! inter-word
18467 \begin_layout Enumerate
18471 \begin_inset space ~
18476 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18477 \begin_inset space ~
18481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18483 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18488 \begin_inset Index idx
18491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18500 \begin_layout Enumerate
18504 \begin_inset space ~
18508 \begin_inset space ~
18512 \begin_inset space ~
18519 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18521 \begin_inset space ~
18526 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18527 This function is also bound to
18530 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18536 \begin_layout Standard
18537 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18540 \begin_layout Itemize
18542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18546 \begin_inset space \space{}
18549 this is too much space!
18552 \begin_layout Itemize
18553 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18557 \begin_layout Standard
18558 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18559 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18561 will take care of this.
18564 \begin_layout Standard
18565 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18569 \begin_inset space ~
18575 feature described in the section
18577 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18582 Additional Features
18587 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18589 \begin_inset Index idx
18592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18593 Typography ! Quotation marks
18599 \begin_inset Index idx
18602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18603 Quotation marks | see
18607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18633 \begin_layout Standard
18635 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18636 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18637 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18647 The keyboard character,
18651 , generates this automatically.
18654 \begin_layout Standard
18655 You can specify what character the
18659 key produces by using the submenu
18665 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18669 \begin_inset Index idx
18672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18673 Document ! Settings
18678 dialog and switching the
18682 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18683 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18685 \begin_inset space ~
18691 \begin_layout Labeling
18692 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18704 \begin_inset space ~
18708 \begin_inset space ~
18712 \begin_inset Quotes els
18716 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18730 \begin_inset Quotes els
18734 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18737 quotation marks (as common, e.
18738 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18744 \begin_layout Labeling
18745 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18748 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18752 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18756 \begin_inset space ~
18760 \begin_inset space ~
18764 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18768 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18774 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18778 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18782 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18786 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18789 quotation marks (as common, e.
18790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18796 \begin_layout Labeling
18797 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18800 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18804 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18808 \begin_inset space ~
18812 \begin_inset space ~
18816 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18820 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18826 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18830 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18834 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18838 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18841 quotation marks (as common, e.
18842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18848 \begin_layout Labeling
18849 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18852 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18856 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18860 \begin_inset space ~
18864 \begin_inset space ~
18868 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18872 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18878 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18882 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18886 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18890 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18893 quotation marks (as common, e.
18894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18900 \begin_layout Labeling
18901 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18904 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18908 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18912 \begin_inset space ~
18916 \begin_inset space ~
18920 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18924 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18930 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18934 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18938 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18942 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18945 quotation marks (as common, e.
18946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18949 g., in Switzerland)
18952 \begin_layout Labeling
18953 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18956 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18960 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18964 \begin_inset space ~
18968 \begin_inset space ~
18972 \begin_inset Quotes als
18976 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18982 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18986 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18990 \begin_inset Quotes als
18994 \begin_inset Quotes ars
18997 quotation marks (as common, e.
18998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19004 \begin_layout Labeling
19005 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19008 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19012 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19016 \begin_inset space ~
19020 \begin_inset space ~
19024 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19028 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19034 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19038 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19042 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19046 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19049 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19052 \begin_layout Labeling
19053 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19056 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19060 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19064 \begin_inset space ~
19068 \begin_inset space ~
19072 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19076 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19082 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19086 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19090 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19094 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19097 quotation marks (as common, e.
19098 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19101 g., in Great Britain)
19104 \begin_layout Labeling
19105 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19108 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19112 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19116 \begin_inset space ~
19120 \begin_inset space ~
19124 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19128 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19134 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19138 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19142 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19146 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19149 quotation marks (as common, e.
19150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19156 \begin_layout Labeling
19157 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19160 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19164 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19168 \begin_inset space ~
19172 \begin_inset space ~
19176 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19180 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19186 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19190 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19194 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19198 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19201 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19206 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19207 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19208 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19209 the inner marks differ).
19217 \begin_layout Labeling
19218 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19221 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19225 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19229 \begin_inset space ~
19233 \begin_inset space ~
19237 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19241 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19247 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19251 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19255 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19259 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19262 quotation marks (as common, e.
19263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19269 \begin_layout Labeling
19270 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19273 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19277 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19281 \begin_inset space ~
19285 \begin_inset space ~
19289 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19293 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19299 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19303 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19307 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19311 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19314 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19317 \begin_layout Labeling
19318 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19319 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19327 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19333 \begin_inset space ~
19337 \begin_inset space ~
19343 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19351 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19355 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19359 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19363 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19367 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19370 quotation marks (as common, e.
19371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19379 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19380 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19388 \begin_layout Labeling
19389 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19390 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19398 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19404 \begin_inset space ~
19408 \begin_inset space ~
19414 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19422 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19426 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19430 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19434 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19438 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19441 quotation marks (as common, e.
19442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19445 g., in North Korea and China)
19449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19450 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19451 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19459 \begin_layout Standard
19460 Inner quotation marks
19464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19465 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19466 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19467 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19475 does not necessarily mean
19476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19484 This is why we call them
19485 \begin_inset Quotes els
19489 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19505 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19507 \begin_inset Quotes els
19511 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19514 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19517 arg "quote-insert inner"
19522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19528 \begin_layout Standard
19529 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19530 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19531 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19532 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19533 If you check the setting
19535 Use dynamic quotation marks
19539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19540 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19543 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19544 they appear in a special color).
19545 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19546 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19551 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19554 \begin_layout Standard
19555 Individual quotation marks (i.
19556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19559 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19560 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19564 \begin_layout Subsection
19566 \begin_inset Index idx
19569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19570 Typography ! Ligatures
19576 \begin_inset Index idx
19579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19610 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19617 \begin_layout Standard
19618 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19619 print them as single characters.
19620 These groups are known as
19625 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19626 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19628 Here are the standard ligatures:
19631 \begin_layout Itemize
19635 \begin_layout Itemize
19639 \begin_layout Itemize
19643 \begin_layout Itemize
19647 \begin_layout Itemize
19651 \begin_layout Standard
19652 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19655 \begin_layout Standard
19656 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19657 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19665 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19674 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19681 To break a ligature, use
19683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19686 \begin_inset space ~
19693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19704 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19721 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19729 \begin_layout Subsection
19731 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19733 \begin_inset Index idx
19736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19746 \begin_layout Standard
19749 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19750 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19754 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19757 \begin_layout Description
19759 The name of the game.
19762 \begin_layout Description
19764 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19768 \begin_layout Description
19770 The \SpecialChar TeX
19771 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19775 \begin_layout Description
19776 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19777 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19781 \begin_layout Standard
19782 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19788 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19792 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19796 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19797 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19798 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19799 converges to the number
19800 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19803 : The actual version is
19804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19812 , the previous one was
19813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19824 \begin_layout Subsection
19826 \begin_inset Index idx
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19838 \begin_layout Standard
19839 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19840 space between two words.
19841 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19851 for units use the menu
19853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19854 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19856 \begin_inset space ~
19864 arg "space-insert thin"
19870 \begin_layout Standard
19871 Here is an example to show the differences:
19874 \begin_layout Standard
19875 \begin_inset Tabular
19876 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19877 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19878 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19879 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 \begin_inset space ~
19890 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19902 space between number and unit
19909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19918 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19930 half space between number and unit
19943 \begin_layout Subsection
19945 \begin_inset Index idx
19948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19949 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19957 \begin_layout Standard
19958 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19960 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19961 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19962 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19963 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19964 These bits of text became known as
19975 \begin_layout Standard
19976 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
19977 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
19978 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
19979 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
19980 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
19981 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
19982 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
19983 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
19984 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
19985 \begin_inset Newline newline
19993 \begin_inset Newline newline
20001 \begin_inset Newline newline
20004 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20005 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20006 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20008 \begin_inset space ~
20012 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20014 key "latexcompanion"
20020 \begin_inset space ~
20024 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20031 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20032 's page break mechanism.
20035 \begin_layout Chapter
20036 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20039 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20046 \begin_layout Standard
20047 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20050 \begin_inset space ~
20056 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20059 \begin_layout Section
20061 \begin_inset Index idx
20064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20080 \begin_layout Standard
20082 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20085 \begin_layout Description
20088 \begin_inset space ~
20091 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20092 \begin_inset Newline newline
20096 \begin_inset Note Note
20099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20100 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20108 \begin_layout Description
20109 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20110 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20111 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20114 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20115 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20117 \begin_inset space ~
20123 \begin_inset Newline newline
20127 \begin_inset Note Comment
20130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20140 \begin_layout Description
20142 \begin_inset space ~
20145 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20146 set in the document settings under
20148 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20150 \begin_inset space ~
20156 \begin_inset Newline newline
20160 \begin_inset Newline newline
20164 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20173 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20174 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20179 of a comment that appears in the output.
20185 \begin_inset Newline newline
20189 \begin_inset Newline newline
20192 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20195 \begin_layout Standard
20196 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20204 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20208 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20211 \begin_layout Section
20213 \begin_inset Index idx
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20223 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20225 name "sec:Footnotes"
20232 \begin_layout Standard
20234 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20240 or the toolbar button
20243 arg "footnote-insert"
20255 \begin_inset Graphics
20256 filename clipart/footnote.png
20265 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20266 's representation of your footnote.
20276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20295 label, the box will
20299 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20300 Clicking on the box label again will close
20313 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20314 and click on the footnote
20329 \begin_layout Standard
20330 Here is an example footnote:
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20339 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20347 \begin_layout Standard
20348 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20349 position where the footnote box is placed.
20350 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20351 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20352 according to the document class.
20354 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20355 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20361 ey are described in the
20364 \begin_inset space ~
20372 \begin_layout Section
20374 \begin_inset Index idx
20377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20386 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20393 \begin_layout Standard
20394 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20396 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20398 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20400 \begin_inset space ~
20405 or the toolbar button
20408 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20434 appearing within your text.
20435 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20436 's representation of your margin
20445 \begin_layout Standard
20446 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20450 \begin_inset Marginal
20453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20455 This is a marginal note.
20463 \begin_layout Standard
20464 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20465 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20466 pages, right on odd pages.
20469 \begin_layout Standard
20470 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20473 \begin_inset space ~
20481 \begin_inset space ~
20489 \begin_layout Section
20490 Graphics and Images
20491 \begin_inset Index idx
20494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20501 \begin_inset Index idx
20504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20513 name "sec:Graphics"
20520 \begin_layout Standard
20521 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20522 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20525 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20534 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20537 \begin_layout Standard
20538 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20543 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20544 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20546 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20547 \begin_inset space ~
20551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20553 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20560 \begin_layout Standard
20565 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20566 of the image in the output.
20567 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20571 \begin_inset space ~
20575 \begin_inset space ~
20584 \begin_inset space ~
20588 \begin_inset space ~
20592 \begin_inset space ~
20597 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20598 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20606 \begin_layout Standard
20610 \begin_inset space ~
20614 \begin_inset space ~
20619 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20620 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20622 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20627 \begin_inset space ~
20632 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20633 with the image size is printed.
20636 \begin_layout Standard
20637 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20638 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20640 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20643 \begin_layout Standard
20645 \begin_inset Graphics
20646 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20654 \begin_layout Standard
20655 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20656 the image into a float, see section
20657 \begin_inset space ~
20661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20663 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20670 \begin_layout Subsection
20672 \begin_inset Index idx
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20684 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20691 \begin_layout Standard
20692 You can insert images in any known file format.
20693 But as we explained in section
20694 \begin_inset space ~
20698 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20700 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20704 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20706 therefore uses the program
20710 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20711 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20712 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20713 \begin_inset space ~
20717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20719 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20726 \begin_layout Standard
20727 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20730 \begin_layout Description
20732 \begin_inset space ~
20735 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20736 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20737 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20738 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20741 Graphics Interchange Format
20742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20745 (GIF, file extension
20746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20758 \begin_inset Index idx
20761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20793 Portable Network Graphics
20794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20797 (PNG, file extension
20798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20810 \begin_inset Index idx
20813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20845 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20849 (JPG, file extension
20850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20874 \begin_inset Index idx
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20908 \begin_layout Description
20910 \begin_inset space ~
20913 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20915 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20916 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20917 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20918 \begin_inset Newline newline
20921 Scalable image formats can be
20922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20925 Scalable Vector Graphics
20926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20929 (SVG, file extension
20930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20942 \begin_inset Index idx
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20977 Encapsulated PostScript
20978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20981 (EPS, file extension
20982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20994 \begin_inset Index idx
20997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21029 Portable Document Format
21030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21033 (PDF, file extension
21034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21046 \begin_inset Index idx
21049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21064 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21065 result will not be scalable.
21066 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21072 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21080 \begin_layout Standard
21081 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21088 \begin_layout Subsection
21089 Grouping of Image Settings
21090 \begin_inset Index idx
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21094 Images ! Settings grouping
21102 \begin_layout Standard
21103 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21105 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21106 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21108 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21109 need to manually change each of them.
21113 \begin_layout Standard
21114 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21117 \begin_inset space ~
21121 \begin_inset space ~
21133 \begin_inset space ~
21137 \begin_inset space ~
21143 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21144 and checking the name of the desired group.
21147 \begin_layout Section
21149 \begin_inset Index idx
21152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21168 \begin_layout Standard
21169 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21172 arg "tabular-insert"
21177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21181 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21182 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21183 from the rest of the table.
21184 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21185 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21187 Here is an example table:
21190 \begin_layout Standard
21192 \begin_inset Tabular
21193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21194 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21198 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21398 \begin_layout Subsection
21402 \begin_layout Standard
21403 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21406 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21410 This brings up the table dialog.
21411 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21412 cursor is placed currently.
21413 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21414 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21415 done on all of your selection.
21418 \begin_layout Standard
21419 In addition to the table dialog, the
21422 \begin_inset space ~
21427 helps you in setting table properties.
21428 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21431 \begin_layout Standard
21435 \begin_inset space ~
21440 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21441 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21442 current cell respectively.
21443 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21445 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21446 of text, see section
21447 \begin_inset space ~
21451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21453 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21460 \begin_layout Standard
21461 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21462 using the check box
21471 This will merge the cells to
21475 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21476 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21477 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21478 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21479 in the last row without the upper border:
21482 \begin_layout Standard
21484 \begin_inset Tabular
21485 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21486 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21487 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21488 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21489 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21490 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21501 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21510 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21621 \begin_layout Standard
21622 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21623 -arguments for the table.
21624 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21625 explained in the chapter
21632 \begin_inset space ~
21638 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21639 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21640 but are visible in the output.
21643 \begin_layout Standard
21644 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21652 Most DVI-viewers are
21656 able to display rotations.
21664 \begin_layout Standard
21669 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21674 adds lines for all cell borders.
21677 \begin_layout Subsection
21679 \begin_inset Index idx
21682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21683 Tables ! Multi-page
21689 \begin_inset Index idx
21692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 \begin_layout Standard
21702 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21705 \begin_inset space ~
21709 \begin_inset space ~
21717 \begin_inset space ~
21722 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21723 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21726 \begin_layout Description
21731 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21732 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21733 Except for the first page, if
21736 \begin_inset space ~
21744 \begin_layout Description
21748 \begin_inset space ~
21753 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21754 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21757 \begin_layout Description
21762 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21763 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21764 except for the last page, if
21767 \begin_inset space ~
21775 \begin_layout Description
21779 \begin_inset space ~
21784 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21785 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21788 \begin_layout Description
21789 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21790 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21792 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21796 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21799 \begin_inset space ~
21807 \begin_layout Standard
21808 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21809 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21810 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21816 In this context, first means first in this order:
21819 \begin_inset space ~
21831 \begin_inset space ~
21836 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21839 \begin_layout Standard
21841 \begin_inset Tabular
21842 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21843 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21844 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21845 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21846 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21847 <row endfirsthead="true">
21848 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21859 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21878 <row endfirsthead="true">
21879 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21911 <row endhead="true">
21912 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21923 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21932 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21942 <row endhead="true">
21943 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21954 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21963 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21975 <row endfoot="true">
21976 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21987 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21996 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22027 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22968 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22977 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22986 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22997 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23028 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23090 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23121 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23152 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23183 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23214 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23245 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23276 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23307 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23369 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23431 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23462 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23524 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23555 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23617 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23679 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23710 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23741 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23772 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23834 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23896 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23927 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23957 <row endlastfoot="true">
23958 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23995 \begin_layout Subsection
23997 \begin_inset Index idx
24000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24007 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24009 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24016 \begin_layout Standard
24017 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24018 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24019 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24020 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24024 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24027 \begin_layout Standard
24028 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24029 for the column in the table dialog.
24030 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24031 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24035 \begin_layout Standard
24037 \begin_inset Tabular
24038 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24039 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24041 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24042 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24062 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24131 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24187 This is longer now.
24192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24243 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24244 This is longer now.
24249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 \begin_layout Standard
24276 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24277 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24282 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24283 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24289 Selection with the mouse or with
24293 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24294 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24295 the selection from outside the table.
24298 \begin_layout Section
24300 \begin_inset Index idx
24303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24319 \begin_layout Subsection
24323 \begin_layout Standard
24324 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24325 have a fixed location.
24327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24334 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24342 \begin_inset space ~
24347 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24348 too many notes on the current page.
24351 \begin_layout Standard
24352 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24353 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24354 and pages without text.
24355 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24356 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24357 Floats are therefore numbered.
24358 Referencing is described in section
24359 \begin_inset space ~
24363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24365 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24372 \begin_layout Standard
24373 To insert a float, use the menu
24375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24379 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24380 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24382 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24383 \begin_inset Index idx
24386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24392 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24393 paragraph within the float.
24394 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24395 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24396 left-clicking on the box label.
24397 A closed float box looks like this:
24398 \begin_inset Graphics
24399 filename clipart/float.png
24404 – a gray button with a red label.
24407 \begin_layout Standard
24408 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24410 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24413 \begin_layout Subsection
24415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24417 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24422 \begin_inset Index idx
24425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 Floats ! Figure floats
24434 \begin_layout Standard
24436 \begin_inset space ~
24440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24442 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24446 was created using the menu
24448 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24449 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24455 arg "float-insert figure"
24459 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24462 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24468 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24472 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24473 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24475 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24477 \begin_inset space ~
24485 arg "layout-paragraph"
24491 \begin_layout Standard
24492 \begin_inset Float figure
24497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24499 \begin_inset Graphics
24500 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24510 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24515 name "fig:A-star-in"
24532 \begin_layout Standard
24533 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24534 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24536 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24545 ) and refer to it using the menu
24547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24553 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24557 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24558 vague references like
24559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24566 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24567 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24577 For more about cross-references, see section
24578 \begin_inset space ~
24582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24584 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24591 \begin_layout Standard
24592 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24593 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24594 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24595 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24596 as described in section
24597 \begin_inset space ~
24601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24603 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24609 \begin_inset space ~
24613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24615 reference "fig:Two-images"
24619 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24620 You can also set the images one below the other.
24622 \begin_inset space ~
24626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24628 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24635 reference "fig:Star"
24639 are the subfigures.
24642 \begin_layout Standard
24643 \begin_inset Float figure
24648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24649 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24653 \begin_inset Float figure
24658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24659 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24664 name "fig:Undefinable"
24676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24677 \begin_inset Graphics
24678 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24690 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24694 \begin_inset Float figure
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24718 \begin_inset Graphics
24719 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24731 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24738 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24741 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24743 name "fig:Two-images"
24760 \begin_layout Subsection
24762 \begin_inset Index idx
24765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24766 Floats ! Table floats
24774 \begin_layout Standard
24775 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24777 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24778 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24781 or the toolbar button
24784 arg "float-insert table"
24788 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24789 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24790 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24792 \begin_inset space ~
24796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24798 reference "tab:Table-float"
24805 \begin_layout Standard
24806 \begin_inset Float table
24811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24812 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24817 name "tab:Table-float"
24829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24831 \begin_inset Tabular
24832 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24833 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24834 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24835 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24836 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24963 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
24971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24984 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24987 \end{array}\right]$
24995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25029 \begin_layout Subsection
25031 \begin_inset Index idx
25034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25043 \begin_layout Standard
25045 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25046 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25047 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25049 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25057 \begin_inset space ~
25065 \begin_layout Section
25067 \begin_inset Index idx
25070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25079 \begin_layout Standard
25081 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25083 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25084 \begin_inset space \space{}
25091 \begin_layout Standard
25092 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25093 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25095 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25099 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25100 and its alignment within the page.
25103 \begin_layout Standard
25105 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25115 height_special "totalheight"
25120 backgroundcolor "none"
25123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25126 This is a minipage.
25127 The text is set in an italic style.
25130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25133 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25134 another formatting.
25142 \begin_layout Standard
25143 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25146 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25150 as described in section
25151 \begin_inset space ~
25155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25157 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25162 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25168 \begin_layout Standard
25169 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25179 height_special "totalheight"
25184 backgroundcolor "none"
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25188 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25189 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25195 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25199 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25209 height_special "totalheight"
25214 backgroundcolor "none"
25217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25218 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25219 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25227 \begin_layout Standard
25228 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25234 \begin_layout Standard
25235 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25237 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25244 \begin_inset space ~
25252 \begin_layout Chapter
25253 Mathematical Formulas
25254 \begin_inset Index idx
25257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25264 \begin_inset Index idx
25267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25298 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25305 \begin_layout Standard
25306 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25311 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25314 \begin_layout Section
25316 \begin_inset Index idx
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25328 \begin_layout Standard
25329 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25342 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25344 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25345 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25346 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25354 \begin_layout Standard
25355 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25359 \begin_inset space ~
25364 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25367 \begin_layout Standard
25368 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25369 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25372 \begin_layout Standard
25373 This is a line with an inline formula
25374 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25380 \begin_layout Standard
25381 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25382 paragraph, like this one:
25383 \begin_inset Formula
25390 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25393 \begin_layout Standard
25395 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25397 For example, typing
25398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25411 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25412 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25416 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25419 \begin_inset space ~
25427 \begin_layout Subsection
25428 Navigating in Formulas
25429 \begin_inset Index idx
25432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25441 \begin_layout Standard
25442 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25443 achieved with the arrow keys.
25445 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25446 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25451 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25452 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25456 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25460 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25463 \end{array}\right]$
25471 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25476 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25477 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25480 \begin_layout Standard
25485 , printed in this document as
25486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25490 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25497 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25498 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25499 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25504 For example, if you want
25505 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25513 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25523 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25527 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25532 , since in the latter case only the
25535 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25540 will be under the square root sign:
25541 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25547 \begin_layout Standard
25548 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25550 \begin_inset Formula
25552 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25561 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25562 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25565 \begin_layout Subsection
25569 \begin_layout Standard
25570 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25571 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25575 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25576 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25577 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25578 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25579 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25583 \begin_layout Subsection
25584 Exponents and Subscripts
25585 \begin_inset Index idx
25588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25595 \begin_inset Index idx
25598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25607 \begin_layout Standard
25608 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25611 arg "math-superscript"
25617 arg "math-subscript"
25620 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25622 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25625 , type in a formula
25628 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25638 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25644 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25648 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25654 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25660 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25669 , you have to use an extra
25673 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25674 For example, if you want
25675 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25681 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25687 Subscripts are similar: To get
25688 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25694 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25702 \begin_layout Subsection
25704 \begin_inset Index idx
25707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25716 \begin_layout Standard
25717 Create a fraction either with the command
25723 or by using the icon
25726 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25732 \begin_inset space ~
25738 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25739 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25740 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25745 To move back up, press
25750 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25751 \begin_inset Formula
25753 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25756 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25764 \begin_layout Subsection
25766 \begin_inset Index idx
25769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25778 \begin_layout Standard
25779 Roots can be created using the
25782 \begin_inset space ~
25790 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25796 arg "math-insert \\root"
25818 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25824 always produces a square root.
25827 \begin_layout Subsection
25828 Operators with Limits
25829 \begin_inset Index idx
25832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25839 \begin_inset Index idx
25842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25849 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25851 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25858 \begin_layout Standard
25860 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25864 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25867 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25868 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25869 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25870 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25871 The sum operator will automatically place its
25872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25879 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25881 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25885 \begin_inset Formula
25887 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25892 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25896 \begin_layout Standard
25897 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25899 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25900 behind the operator and using the menu
25902 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25903 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25905 \begin_inset space ~
25909 \begin_inset space ~
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25933 \begin_inset Index idx
25936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25943 \begin_inset Formula
25945 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25950 which will place the
25951 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25963 In inline formulas it looks like this:
25964 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
25970 \begin_layout Standard
25971 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
25978 Have a look at section
25979 \begin_inset space ~
25983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25985 reference "subsec:Functions"
25989 for an explanation of function macros.
25992 \begin_layout Subsection
25994 \begin_inset Index idx
25997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26006 \begin_layout Standard
26007 Most math symbols can be found in the
26010 \begin_inset space ~
26015 under one of several categories; including
26032 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26036 \begin_layout Standard
26037 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26038 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26039 don't have to use the
26042 \begin_inset space ~
26047 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26049 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26052 \begin_layout Subsection
26054 \begin_inset Index idx
26057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26066 \begin_layout Standard
26067 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26073 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26079 \begin_inset space ~
26087 arg "math-insert \\space"
26091 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26092 For example, the sequence
26097 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26100 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26102 \begin_inset Graphics
26103 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26108 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26109 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26110 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26111 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26112 , because they are negative
26114 Here are two examples:
26117 \begin_layout Standard
26127 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26133 \begin_layout Standard
26143 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26149 \begin_layout Subsection
26151 \begin_inset Index idx
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26163 name "subsec:Functions"
26170 \begin_layout Standard
26174 \begin_inset space ~
26179 contains under the button
26182 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26185 a number of function macros, such as
26186 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26190 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26198 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26205 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26206 avoid confusions, because
26207 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26211 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26217 \begin_layout Standard
26218 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26220 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26224 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26230 \begin_layout Standard
26231 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26232 are placed, as described in section
26233 \begin_inset space ~
26237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26239 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26246 \begin_layout Subsection
26248 \begin_inset Index idx
26251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26260 \begin_layout Standard
26261 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26263 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26264 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26265 commands, for example, to enter
26266 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26269 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26270 Our example is entered by typing
26275 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26282 \begin_inset space ~
26286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26288 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26292 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26295 \begin_layout Standard
26296 \begin_inset Float table
26301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26302 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26307 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26311 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26321 \begin_inset Tabular
26322 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26323 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26324 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26325 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26326 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26410 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26464 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26518 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26572 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26626 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26680 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26734 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26788 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26842 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26861 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26887 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26908 \begin_layout Standard
26909 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26912 \begin_inset space ~
26920 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26923 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26927 \begin_layout Section
26928 Brackets and Delimiters
26929 \begin_inset Index idx
26932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26939 \begin_inset Index idx
26942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26951 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
26958 \begin_layout Standard
26959 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
26961 For some purposes, using just the keys
26966 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
26967 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
26968 toolbar delimiter icon
26971 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26975 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
26976 \begin_inset Formula
26978 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
26986 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
26987 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
26991 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
26994 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27000 \begin_inset Formula
27002 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27010 \begin_layout Standard
27011 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27012 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27016 \begin_layout Standard
27017 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27018 left side and right side.
27019 If you use the option
27022 \begin_inset space ~
27027 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27028 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27030 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27035 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27036 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27039 \begin_layout Standard
27040 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27041 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27042 is to go inside the brackets.
27043 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27048 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27049 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27050 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27054 arg "math-delim ( )"
27060 \begin_layout Section
27061 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27062 \begin_inset Index idx
27065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27072 \begin_inset Index idx
27075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27082 \begin_inset Index idx
27085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27086 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27094 \begin_layout Standard
27095 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27099 \begin_inset space ~
27107 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27111 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27112 Here is an example:
27113 \begin_inset Formula
27115 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27124 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27125 \begin_inset space ~
27129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27131 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27136 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27137 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27138 This alignment is set in the box
27143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27192 for every column as default.
27193 For example, the sequence
27194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27205 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27206 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27207 corresponds to the relevant column.
27208 The result will look like this:
27209 \begin_inset Formula
27212 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27213 column & has & has\,right\\
27214 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27223 \begin_layout Standard
27224 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27227 arg "newline-insert newline"
27230 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27231 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27233 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27236 or the math toolbar.
27239 \begin_layout Standard
27240 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27241 It can be created with the menu
27243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27244 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27246 \begin_inset space ~
27258 Here is an example:
27259 \begin_inset Formula
27273 \begin_layout Standard
27274 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27277 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27280 arg "newline-insert newline"
27284 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27289 arg "newline-insert newline"
27292 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27300 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27301 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27302 A new row is created by every further entry of
27305 arg "newline-insert newline"
27309 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27310 Here is an example:
27311 \begin_inset Formula
27313 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27314 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27319 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27320 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27321 \begin_inset Formula
27323 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27331 \begin_layout Standard
27332 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27339 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27340 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27343 reference "eq:asquared"
27348 The other types are described in section
27349 \begin_inset space ~
27353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27355 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27362 \begin_layout Section
27363 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27364 \begin_inset Index idx
27367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27368 Math ! Formula numbering
27374 \begin_inset Index idx
27377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27378 Math ! Referencing formulas
27384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27386 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27393 \begin_layout Standard
27394 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27396 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27397 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27399 \begin_inset space ~
27403 \begin_inset space ~
27411 arg "math-number-toggle"
27415 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27416 within parentheses.
27417 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27418 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27419 the document class.
27420 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27421 separated by a dot:
27422 \begin_inset Formula
27432 arg "math-number-toggle"
27435 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27436 You can only number displayed formulas.
27439 \begin_layout Standard
27440 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27443 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27445 \begin_inset space ~
27449 \begin_inset space ~
27457 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27460 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27461 \begin_inset Formula
27464 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27470 To number all lines use the shortcut
27473 arg "math-number-toggle"
27479 \begin_layout Standard
27480 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27483 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27484 A label is inserted with the menu
27486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27495 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27496 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27497 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27509 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27510 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27511 We inserted in the following example the label
27512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27519 in the second line:
27520 \begin_inset Formula
27522 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27523 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27528 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27529 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27530 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27534 \begin_inset space ~
27542 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27546 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27547 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27548 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27549 as the formula number:
27552 \begin_layout Standard
27553 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27556 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27563 \begin_layout Standard
27564 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27565 's cross-reference box are described in section
27566 \begin_inset space ~
27570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27572 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27577 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27585 \begin_layout Section
27586 User defined math macros
27587 \begin_inset Index idx
27590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27599 \begin_layout Standard
27601 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27602 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27603 Math macros are explained in section
27606 \begin_inset space ~
27618 \begin_layout Section
27622 \begin_layout Subsection
27624 \begin_inset Index idx
27627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27636 \begin_layout Standard
27637 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27638 To set a font in a formula, use the
27641 \begin_inset space ~
27649 arg "math-insert \\font"
27652 , or enter its command, listed in table
27653 \begin_inset space ~
27657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27659 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27666 \begin_layout Standard
27667 \begin_inset Float table
27672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27673 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27678 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27682 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27692 \begin_inset Tabular
27693 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27694 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27695 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27696 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27728 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27755 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27782 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27815 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27842 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27869 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27903 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27930 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27964 \begin_layout Standard
27965 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27973 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
27989 \begin_layout Standard
27990 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
27991 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
27996 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
27997 space when you need a space in the box.
27998 Here is an example where
27999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28010 denotes the set of numbers:
28011 \begin_inset Formula
28013 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28021 \begin_layout Standard
28022 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28023 You can, for example, put a character in
28032 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28036 \begin_inset Newline newline
28039 So it is better not to use this feature.
28042 \begin_layout Standard
28043 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28044 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28048 \begin_inset Newline newline
28051 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28057 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28058 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28064 \begin_layout Standard
28071 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28074 \begin_layout Standard
28075 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28077 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28078 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28080 \begin_inset space ~
28088 \begin_layout Subsection
28090 \begin_inset Index idx
28093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28102 \begin_layout Standard
28103 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28105 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28109 \begin_inset space ~
28113 \begin_inset space ~
28121 \begin_inset space ~
28129 arg "math-insert \\font"
28133 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28134 in black instead of blue.
28135 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28136 Here is an example:
28137 \begin_inset Formula
28140 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28141 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28150 \begin_layout Subsection
28152 \begin_inset Index idx
28155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28164 \begin_layout Standard
28165 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28166 automatically chosen in most situations.
28184 For most characters,
28192 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28193 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28198 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28199 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28200 thinks are appropriate.
28201 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28204 arg "math-insert \\style"
28208 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28209 For example, you can set
28210 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28213 , which is normally in
28222 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28226 The four styles are used in the following example:
28229 \begin_layout Standard
28230 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28234 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28238 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28242 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28248 \begin_layout Standard
28249 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28250 is set in a particular size with the menu
28252 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28254 \begin_inset space ~
28259 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28260 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28261 will be adjusted to correspond.
28262 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28273 \begin_layout Standard
28277 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28283 \begin_layout Section
28284 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28286 \begin_inset Index idx
28289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28296 \begin_inset Index idx
28299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28308 \begin_layout Standard
28310 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28311 that are in common use.
28314 \begin_layout Subsection
28315 Enabling AMS-Support
28318 \begin_layout Standard
28319 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28320 the document by selecting the checkbox
28323 \begin_inset space ~
28327 \begin_inset space ~
28331 \begin_inset space ~
28338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28342 \begin_inset Index idx
28345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28346 Document ! Settings
28354 \begin_inset space ~
28360 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28361 -errors in formulas,
28362 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28365 \begin_layout Subsection
28367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28369 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28374 \begin_inset Index idx
28377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28378 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28386 \begin_layout Standard
28387 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28388 provides a selection of different formula types.
28390 allows you to choose between
28411 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28412 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28419 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28422 \begin_layout Chapter
28426 \begin_layout Section
28428 \begin_inset Index idx
28431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28440 name "sec:Cross-References"
28447 \begin_layout Standard
28448 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28449 's strengths is cross-references.
28450 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28452 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28453 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28454 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28457 \begin_layout Enumerate
28461 \begin_layout Enumerate
28462 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28464 name "enu:Second-item"
28471 \begin_layout Enumerate
28475 \begin_layout Standard
28476 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28478 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28481 or by pressing the toolbar button
28488 A gray label box like this:
28489 \begin_inset Graphics
28490 filename clipart/label.png
28494 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28496 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28531 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28532 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28548 \begin_layout Standard
28549 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28554 or the toolbar button
28557 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28561 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28562 \begin_inset Graphics
28563 filename clipart/reference.png
28567 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28569 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28582 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28586 \begin_layout Standard
28587 As an alternative to
28589 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28592 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28597 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28598 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28600 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28612 \begin_layout Standard
28613 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28614 \begin_inset space ~
28618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28620 reference "enu:Second-item"
28627 \begin_layout Standard
28628 It is recommended to use a protected space
28632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28633 described in section
28634 \begin_inset space ~
28638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28640 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28649 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28650 line breaks between them.
28653 \begin_layout Standard
28654 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28657 \begin_layout Description
28658 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28661 reference "fig:Two-images"
28668 \begin_layout Description
28669 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28670 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28682 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28689 \begin_layout Description
28690 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28691 \begin_inset space ~
28695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28696 LatexCommand pageref
28697 reference "fig:Two-images"
28704 \begin_layout Description
28706 \begin_inset space ~
28710 \begin_inset space ~
28713 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28715 LatexCommand vpageref
28716 reference "fig:Two-images"
28721 \begin_inset Newline newline
28724 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28725 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28726 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28727 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28728 it prints “on the next page”.
28729 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28732 \begin_layout Description
28734 \begin_inset space ~
28738 \begin_inset space ~
28742 \begin_inset space ~
28745 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28748 reference "fig:Two-images"
28753 \begin_inset Newline newline
28756 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28762 ; otherwise it behaves like
28766 \begin_inset space ~
28770 \begin_inset space ~
28779 \begin_layout Description
28781 \begin_inset space ~
28784 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28785 \begin_inset Newline newline
28789 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28797 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28807 \begin_inset Index idx
28810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28812 packages ! prettyref
28818 \begin_inset Index idx
28821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28823 packages ! refstyle
28834 \begin_inset Newline newline
28837 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28838 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28841 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28845 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28846 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28854 is the default and preferred because
28858 supports only English documents.
28859 The format is specified by using the command
28871 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28872 preamble of the document.
28873 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28891 \begin_inset Newline newline
28898 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28903 \begin_inset Newline newline
28914 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28915 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28917 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28918 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28923 , you might do so as follows:
28924 \begin_inset Newline newline
28931 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28936 \begin_inset Newline newline
28939 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28940 the package documentation
28941 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28943 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28949 \begin_inset Newline newline
28960 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
28967 \begin_layout Description
28969 \begin_inset space ~
28972 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
28973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28974 LatexCommand nameref
28975 reference "fig:Two-images"
28982 \begin_layout Description
28984 \begin_inset space ~
28987 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28988 label for the reference:
28989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28990 LatexCommand labelonly
28991 reference "fig:Two-images"
28996 \begin_inset Newline newline
28999 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29000 Code, if you want to issue a command
29001 that \SpecialChar LyX
29007 , then you may want to use the
29010 \begin_inset space ~
29015 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29025 This is the form needed for e.
29026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29030 \begin_inset space \space{}
29037 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29038 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29040 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29044 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29048 \begin_layout Standard
29049 You can only use the style
29053 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29057 is always possible.
29060 \begin_layout Standard
29061 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29062 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29064 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29065 \begin_inset space ~
29069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29071 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29078 \begin_layout Standard
29079 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29083 \begin_inset space ~
29087 \begin_inset space ~
29092 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29093 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29096 \begin_inset space ~
29101 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29102 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29105 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29111 \begin_layout Standard
29112 You can change labels at any time.
29113 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29114 do not need to think about this.
29117 \begin_layout Standard
29118 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29120 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29124 \begin_layout Standard
29125 References are described in detail in the section
29126 \begin_inset space ~
29136 \begin_inset space ~
29144 \begin_layout Section
29145 Table of Contents and other Listings
29146 \begin_inset Index idx
29149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29156 \begin_inset Index idx
29159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29160 Navigating ! Outline
29166 \begin_inset Index idx
29169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29185 \begin_layout Subsection
29187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29189 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29196 \begin_layout Standard
29197 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29200 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29202 \begin_inset space ~
29206 \begin_inset space ~
29212 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29214 If you click on it, the
29218 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29219 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29220 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29222 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29224 \begin_inset space ~
29229 that is described in section
29230 \begin_inset space ~
29234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29236 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29243 \begin_layout Standard
29244 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29245 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29247 \begin_inset space ~
29251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29253 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29257 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29259 \begin_inset space ~
29263 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29265 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29269 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29271 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29274 \begin_layout Subsection
29275 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29278 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29285 \begin_layout Standard
29286 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29288 You can insert them via the
29290 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29294 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29297 \begin_layout Section
29298 URLs and Hyperlinks
29299 \begin_inset Index idx
29302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29309 \begin_inset Index idx
29312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29321 \begin_layout Subsection
29323 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29332 \begin_layout Standard
29333 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29335 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29341 \begin_layout Standard
29342 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29344 \begin_inset Flex URL
29347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29349 https://www.lyx.org
29357 \begin_layout Standard
29358 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29364 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29368 \begin_layout Standard
29369 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29377 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29386 \begin_layout Subsection
29388 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29390 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29397 \begin_layout Standard
29398 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29403 or with the toolbar button
29410 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29419 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29420 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29423 name "LyX's homepage"
29424 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29429 , an Email address like this:
29430 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29432 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29433 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29439 , or a link to a file.
29444 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29452 \begin_layout Standard
29453 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29466 to the link target.
29469 \begin_layout Standard
29470 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29471 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29472 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29473 the text style dialog.
29474 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29478 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29480 name "LyX's homepage"
29481 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29489 \begin_layout Standard
29490 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29494 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29496 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29497 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29501 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29503 \begin_inset Newline newline
29511 \begin_inset Newline newline
29518 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29521 \begin_layout Section
29523 \begin_inset Index idx
29526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29533 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29535 name "sec:Appendices"
29542 \begin_layout Standard
29543 Appendices are created with the menu
29545 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29547 \begin_inset space ~
29551 \begin_inset space ~
29557 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29558 as the appendix part of the book.
29559 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29562 \begin_layout Standard
29563 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29564 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29565 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29566 and the subsection number.
29567 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29571 \begin_layout Standard
29573 \begin_inset space ~
29577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29579 reference "chap:Credits"
29584 \begin_inset space ~
29588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29590 reference "subsec:Export"
29597 \begin_layout Section
29599 \begin_inset Index idx
29602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29611 name "sec:Bibliography"
29618 \begin_layout Standard
29619 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29621 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29622 \begin_inset space ~
29626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29628 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29635 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29640 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29641 \begin_inset space ~
29645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29647 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29652 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29653 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29654 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29658 using a bibliography database.
29661 \begin_layout Standard
29662 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29663 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29667 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29668 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29669 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29670 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29671 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29674 \begin_layout Subsection
29675 The Bibliography Environment
29676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29678 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29685 \begin_layout Standard
29690 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29692 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29701 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29703 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29704 of ASCII characters only.
29708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29710 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29713 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29719 \begin_inset Newline newline
29723 \begin_inset Flex URL
29726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29728 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29738 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29748 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29749 \begin_inset Newline newline
29756 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29757 the number of the entry.
29762 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29771 \begin_layout Standard
29772 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29777 or the toolbar button
29780 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29784 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29785 containing the available citations.
29786 Select one or more keys from the list and
29796 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29797 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29801 \begin_layout Standard
29802 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29803 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29804 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29816 \begin_layout Standard
29820 Companion Second Edition
29823 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29825 key "latexcompanion"
29833 \begin_layout Standard
29834 The \SpecialChar LyX
29835 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29836 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29846 \begin_layout Standard
29847 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29854 \begin_inset Index idx
29857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29865 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29877 Author A and Author B(Year)
29878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29885 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29887 Then, if you select
29890 \begin_inset space ~
29895 in the document settings
29896 \begin_inset Index idx
29899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29900 Document ! Settings
29907 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29909 \begin_inset space ~
29915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29917 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29924 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29927 \begin_layout Standard
29928 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29931 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29933 \begin_inset space ~
29941 arg "layout-paragraph"
29945 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29948 \begin_layout Subsection
29949 Bibliography databases
29950 \begin_inset Index idx
29953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29954 Bibliography ! Databases
29960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29962 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29969 \begin_layout Standard
29970 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
29975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29976 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
29978 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
29979 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
29984 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
29986 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
29987 your working field in a database.
29988 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
29989 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
29990 list for that document.
29991 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 The database is a text file with the file extension
29997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30008 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30009 The format is explained in
30010 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30017 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30019 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30021 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30027 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30028 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30029 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30031 \begin_inset Flex URL
30034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30036 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30044 \begin_layout Standard
30046 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30047 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30048 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30050 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30052 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30053 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30054 Those are addressed by
30059 \begin_inset Index idx
30062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30064 packages ! biblatex
30070 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30071 (although it has been significantly
30072 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30082 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30083 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30084 might conversely fail to correctly
30085 handle databases that use specific
30094 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30098 \begin_layout Standard
30099 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30104 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30110 \begin_inset Index idx
30113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30114 Document ! Settings
30126 \begin_inset space ~
30131 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30139 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30140 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30142 \begin_inset Index idx
30145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30146 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30155 \begin_layout Standard
30156 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30164 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30166 \begin_inset space ~
30172 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30173 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30181 Add bibliography to TOC
30183 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30188 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30189 in the document or just the cited references.
30191 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30196 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30197 differ from the encoding of the document.
30202 \begin_layout Standard
30203 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30204 style file is a text file with the file extension
30205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30216 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30217 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30218 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30219 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30221 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30227 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30228 \begin_inset Newline newline
30232 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30234 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30244 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30249 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30253 \begin_layout Standard
30254 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30259 \begin_inset Index idx
30262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30263 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30269 \begin_inset Index idx
30272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30274 packages ! biblatex
30282 \begin_layout Standard
30283 Accessing a database via
30287 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30290 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30295 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30297 \begin_inset space ~
30303 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30304 you cannot select a
30309 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30313 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30316 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30317 As for the styles, note the following.
30322 \begin_layout Standard
30327 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30340 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30341 file (text file with the file extension
30342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30353 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30354 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30356 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30360 \begin_layout Standard
30365 styles are not set in the
30368 \begin_inset space ~
30373 dialog, but in the document settings.
30374 \begin_inset Index idx
30377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30378 Document ! Settings
30383 However, in the dialog in the
30387 field, which is only visible if you use
30391 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30392 example how its heading will appear).
30393 These options are described in detail in the
30398 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30408 \begin_layout Standard
30409 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30410 \begin_inset space ~
30414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30416 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30426 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30427 Bibliography Processors
30430 \begin_layout Standard
30431 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30432 uses a bibliography processor,
30433 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30434 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30435 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30437 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30438 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30441 \begin_layout Standard
30442 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30444 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30445 You can do this on a general level in
30447 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30448 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30449 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30452 or for individual documents in
30454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30455 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30459 The following variants are available by default:
30462 \begin_layout Description
30463 biber a specific, modern processor
30464 \begin_inset Index idx
30467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30474 developed exclusively for
30478 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30484 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30489 makes use of; if you use the
30493 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30500 \begin_layout Description
30501 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30502 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30503 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30507 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30510 \begin_layout Description
30511 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30512 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30516 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30520 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30524 features are supported.
30527 \begin_layout Standard
30528 By default (with the
30534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30535 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30548 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30549 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30550 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30553 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30554 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30567 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30568 -based bibliography styles).
30569 This should suit most needs.
30572 \begin_layout Standard
30573 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30574 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30575 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30580 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30581 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30582 You can adjust it in
30584 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30585 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30586 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30592 \begin_layout Standard
30593 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30594 can add below the selection.
30595 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30596 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30602 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30612 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30616 \begin_layout Standard
30618 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30620 These are explained in detail in section
30622 Customizing Bibliographies
30626 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30631 Additional Features
30636 \begin_layout Subsection
30638 \begin_inset Index idx
30641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30642 Bibliography ! Citation format
30648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30650 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30657 \begin_layout Standard
30658 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30663 \begin_inset space \space{}
30666 numerical citation (as
30667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30674 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30682 ) or author-year citations (as
30683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30692 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30696 \begin_layout Standard
30697 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30700 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30701 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30705 \begin_inset Index idx
30708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30709 Document ! Settings
30714 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30720 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30721 labels, is there to use
30724 \begin_inset space ~
30735 \begin_inset space ~
30740 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30743 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30750 \begin_layout Standard
30751 With a bibliography database (see
30752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30754 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30761 ) one has in contrary to the
30765 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30766 These style formats are available:
30769 \begin_layout Description
30771 \begin_inset space ~
30774 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30775 -based approached without any additional packages
30776 (simple numeric citations).
30779 \begin_layout Description
30780 Biblatex loads the package
30785 \begin_inset Index idx
30788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30790 packages ! biblatex
30795 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30797 Biblatex citation style
30801 Biblatex bibliography style
30804 Options to the package
30808 can be entered in the
30815 \begin_layout Description
30817 \begin_inset space ~
30821 \begin_inset space ~
30824 mode) loads the package
30828 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30829 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30841 behavior very closely.
30846 this option has some additional styles.
30851 styles are also supported by this variant.
30854 \begin_layout Description
30856 \begin_inset space ~
30859 (BibTeX) loads the package
30864 \begin_inset Index idx
30867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30874 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30877 \begin_layout Description
30879 \begin_inset space ~
30882 (BibTeX) loads the package
30887 \begin_inset Index idx
30890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30897 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30900 \begin_layout Standard
30909 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30911 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30920 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30922 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30923 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30925 Biblatex citation style
30928 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30934 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30938 \begin_layout Standard
30939 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30940 are available in the
30945 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30946 a name prefix such as
30947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30962 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
30963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30967 \begin_inset space \space{}
30971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30982 \begin_layout Standard
30983 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
30985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30989 \begin_inset space \space{}
30992 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30998 \begin_inset space \space{}
31002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31014 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31018 \begin_inset space ~
31026 \begin_inset space ~
31032 Here is a simple example where the text
31033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31037 \begin_inset space ~
31041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31044 appears after the reference:
31047 \begin_layout Quote
31049 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31052 key "latexcompanion"
31060 \begin_layout Standard
31061 All styles except for
31065 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31075 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31079 \begin_layout Standard
31080 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31081 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31082 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31087 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31088 multi-citation (so-called
31089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31092 qualified citation lists
31093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31099 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31104 dialog will display three columns in the field
31111 \begin_inset space ~
31119 \begin_inset space ~
31127 \begin_inset space ~
31133 If you double-click on an item's
31136 \begin_inset space ~
31144 \begin_inset space ~
31149 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31152 General text before
31158 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31161 \begin_layout Section
31163 \begin_inset Index idx
31166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31182 \begin_layout Standard
31183 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31187 \begin_inset space ~
31192 or the toolbar button
31199 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31200 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31201 by \SpecialChar LyX
31202 as the index entry.
31205 \begin_layout Standard
31206 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31208 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31209 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31211 \begin_inset space ~
31217 A light blue box labeled
31218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31229 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31230 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31234 \begin_layout Standard
31235 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31236 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31237 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31238 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31240 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31242 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31250 \begin_layout Subsection
31251 Grouping Index Entries
31252 \begin_inset Index idx
31255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31264 \begin_layout Standard
31265 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31267 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31268 lists under the entry
31269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31277 First we create the entry
31278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31282 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31286 \begin_inset space ~
31290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31292 reference "subsec:Lists"
31297 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31298 \begin_inset space ~
31302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31304 reference "sec:Itemize"
31308 , we insert the command
31311 \begin_layout Standard
31317 \begin_layout Standard
31321 \begin_layout Standard
31327 \begin_layout Standard
31328 for the enumerated list in section
31329 \begin_inset space ~
31333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31335 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31342 \begin_layout Standard
31343 The exclamation mark
31344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31351 marks the grouping levels.
31352 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31353 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31354 If we don't have an index entry for
31355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31362 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31365 \begin_layout Subsection
31367 \begin_inset Index idx
31370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31371 Index ! Page ranges
31379 \begin_layout Standard
31380 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31382 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31383 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31384 an index entry in section
31385 \begin_inset space ~
31389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31391 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31398 \begin_layout Standard
31401 Paragraph environments|(
31404 \begin_layout Standard
31405 and another entry at the end of section
31406 \begin_inset space ~
31410 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31412 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31419 \begin_layout Standard
31422 Paragraph environments|)
31425 \begin_layout Standard
31427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31450 respectively start and end the index range.
31451 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31452 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31453 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31454 An example is the index entry
31455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31458 Document ! Settings
31459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31465 \begin_layout Subsection
31467 \begin_inset Index idx
31470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31471 Index ! Cross referencing
31479 \begin_layout Standard
31480 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31481 We referred for example in the index entry
31482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31490 \begin_inset space ~
31494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31496 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31500 ) to the index entry
31501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31508 in the same section using the entry
31511 \begin_layout Standard
31514 GIF|see{Image formats}
31517 \begin_layout Standard
31518 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31520 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31521 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31524 \begin_layout Subsection
31526 \begin_inset Index idx
31529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31530 Index ! Entry order
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31539 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31540 follow the rules for the index order.
31541 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31547 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31549 \begin_inset space ~
31553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31555 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31564 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31565 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31590 \begin_inset Index idx
31593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31594 Dummy entries ! maïs
31600 \begin_inset Index idx
31603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31604 Dummy entries ! maître
31610 \begin_inset Index idx
31613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31614 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31619 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31620 maïs, maison, maître.
31621 To achieve this, we use the command
31624 \begin_layout Standard
31627 previous entry@current entry
31630 \begin_layout Standard
31631 In our case we want to have
31632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31647 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31650 \begin_layout Standard
31656 \begin_layout Standard
31657 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31658 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31660 See the next subsection for an example.
31663 \begin_layout Subsection
31665 \begin_inset Index idx
31668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31669 Index ! Entry layout
31677 \begin_layout Standard
31678 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31679 \begin_inset Index idx
31682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31685 This is an italic dummy entry
31690 You can also format the page number using the character
31691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31698 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31699 -command without a backslash.
31700 We can write for example
31703 \begin_layout Standard
31706 italic page number:|textit
31709 \begin_layout Standard
31710 to get the page number in italic.
31711 \begin_inset Index idx
31714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31715 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31720 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31721 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31739 \begin_inset space ~
31745 Have a look at section
31746 \begin_inset space ~
31750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31752 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31756 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31760 \begin_layout Standard
31761 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31769 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31773 to generate the index, see section
31774 \begin_inset space ~
31778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31780 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31789 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31794 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31798 key "latexcompanion"
31811 \begin_layout Standard
31812 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31814 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31815 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31816 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31817 If so, put the following in the preamble
31820 \begin_layout Standard
31832 \begin_layout Standard
31836 \begin_layout Standard
31842 \begin_layout Standard
31843 in the index entry.
31844 \begin_inset Index idx
31847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31848 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31853 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31854 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31855 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31858 \begin_layout Standard
31859 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31860 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31861 a bold font for all index entries.
31862 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31874 documentation for details,
31875 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31877 key "makeindex,xindy"
31885 \begin_layout Subsection
31887 \begin_inset Index idx
31890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31899 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31906 \begin_layout Standard
31907 If the index generation program
31911 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31912 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31916 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31917 distribution, is used.
31921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31926 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31927 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31928 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31929 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31930 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31940 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31942 dialog, see section
31943 \begin_inset space ~
31947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31949 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31954 The available options are listed and explained in
31955 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31957 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31963 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31967 \begin_layout Standard
31968 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31969 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31973 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31977 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31978 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31981 \begin_layout Subsection
31985 \begin_layout Standard
31986 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31987 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31995 next to the standard index.
31997 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31998 that add this feature.
32005 \begin_inset Index idx
32008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32010 packages ! splitidx
32015 package to generate multiple indexes.
32016 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32022 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32024 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32032 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32033 style, but it also includes
32034 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32035 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32043 \begin_layout Standard
32044 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32045 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32047 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32048 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32051 and select the option
32053 Use multiple Indexes
32060 already contains the standard index
32061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32069 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32070 also appear as a heading) to the
32074 input field and press the
32079 The new index now also appears in the list.
32080 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32081 label color to the new index.
32084 \begin_layout Standard
32085 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32088 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32095 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32096 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32097 are additional features:
32100 \begin_layout Itemize
32101 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32102 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32105 \begin_layout Itemize
32106 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32107 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32112 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32113 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32114 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32115 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32118 \begin_layout Itemize
32123 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32124 code in the name of the index.
32127 \begin_layout Section
32128 Nomenclature/Glossary
32129 \begin_inset Index idx
32132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32139 \begin_inset Index idx
32142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32173 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32180 \begin_layout Standard
32181 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32182 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32183 called nomenclature or glossary.
32186 \begin_layout Standard
32187 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32194 \begin_inset Index idx
32197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32205 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32207 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32214 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32218 \begin_layout Standard
32219 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32220 and then use the menu
32222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32228 \begin_inset space ~
32233 or the toolbar button
32236 arg "nomencl-insert"
32241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32252 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32255 \begin_layout Standard
32256 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32257 The first is the term or
32261 that you wish to define.
32266 of the term or symbol.
32269 \begin_layout Standard
32270 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32278 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32279 code for nomenclature entries the option
32283 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32291 \begin_layout Subsection
32292 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32293 \begin_inset Index idx
32296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32297 Nomenclature ! Layout
32305 \begin_layout Standard
32306 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32310 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32317 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32325 \begin_inset Newline newline
32333 \begin_inset Newline newline
32339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32346 character starts/ends the formula.
32347 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32348 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32360 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32370 \begin_layout Standard
32371 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32372 syntax is given in section
32373 \begin_inset space ~
32377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32379 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32386 \begin_layout Standard
32390 \begin_inset space ~
32395 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32397 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32402 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32409 in this document is:
32410 \begin_inset Newline newline
32415 dummy entry for the character
32420 \begin_inset Newline newline
32432 \begin_inset space ~
32442 font use the command
32471 \begin_layout Standard
32472 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32473 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32477 \begin_inset space \space{}
32481 \begin_inset Newline newline
32497 \begin_inset Newline newline
32500 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32501 This command will make the font of all symbols
32508 \begin_inset space ~
32516 \begin_layout Standard
32517 If the characters |
32518 \begin_inset space \space{}
32522 \begin_inset space \space{}
32526 \begin_inset space \space{}
32530 \begin_inset space \space{}
32534 \begin_inset space \space{}
32537 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32538 code they need to be escaped
32539 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32540 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32541 LatexCommand nomenclature
32542 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32543 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32551 \begin_layout Subsection
32552 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32553 \begin_inset Index idx
32556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32557 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32565 \begin_layout Standard
32566 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32567 -code of the symbol
32569 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32571 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32574 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32575 LatexCommand nomenclature
32577 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32585 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32589 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32590 LatexCommand nomenclature
32593 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32599 They will be sorted by
32600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32626 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32629 will be sorted before the
32633 since the character
32634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32641 is considered in sorting.
32644 \begin_layout Standard
32645 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32648 \begin_inset space ~
32653 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32654 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32656 For the example given, you can insert
32660 in this field for the
32661 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32668 will be located before
32669 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32675 \begin_layout Standard
32676 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32681 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32691 \begin_layout Subsection
32692 Nomenclature Options
32693 \begin_inset Index idx
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32697 Nomenclature ! Options
32703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32705 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32712 \begin_layout Standard
32717 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32718 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32721 \begin_layout Description
32722 refeq Appends the phrase
32723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32738 to every nomenclature entry, where
32744 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32747 \begin_layout Description
32748 refpage Appends the phrase
32749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32764 to every nomenclature entry, where
32770 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32773 \begin_layout Description
32774 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32777 \begin_layout Standard
32778 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32779 class options list in the
32781 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32785 In this document the options
32792 \begin_layout Standard
32793 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32799 \begin_layout Standard
32800 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32801 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32806 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32809 \begin_layout Description
32819 \begin_layout Description
32822 nomrefpage Like the
32829 \begin_layout Description
32832 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32841 \begin_layout Description
32845 \begin_inset space ~
32851 \begin_inset space ~
32856 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32859 \begin_layout Standard
32861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32868 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32869 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32873 \begin_layout Standard
32882 \begin_inset Newline newline
32888 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32892 \begin_inset space ~
32904 unskip, see equation
32907 \begin_inset Newline newline
32914 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32915 \begin_inset Newline newline
32921 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32925 \begin_inset space ~
32942 \begin_layout Standard
32943 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32946 \begin_inset space ~
32951 in the document settings under
32954 \begin_inset space ~
32962 \begin_layout Standard
32970 \begin_inset Newline newline
32974 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32978 \begin_inset space ~
32990 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
32992 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
32993 \begin_inset Newline newline
33000 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33001 \begin_inset Newline newline
33005 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33009 \begin_inset space ~
33021 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33026 \begin_layout Subsection
33027 Printing the Nomenclature
33028 \begin_inset Index idx
33031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33032 Nomenclature ! Printing
33040 \begin_layout Standard
33041 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33043 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33044 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33057 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33060 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33061 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33062 You can choose between these settings:
33065 \begin_layout Description
33066 Default a space of 1
33067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33073 \begin_layout Description
33075 \begin_inset space ~
33079 \begin_inset space ~
33082 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33085 \begin_layout Description
33086 Custom custom space
33089 \begin_layout Standard
33090 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33099 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33107 For example, in order to change the name to
33111 , add the following line to the preamble:
33114 \begin_layout Standard
33127 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33130 \begin_layout Standard
33131 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33132 \begin_inset Newline newline
33147 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33150 \begin_layout Subsection
33151 Nomenclature Program
33152 \begin_inset Index idx
33155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33156 Nomenclature ! Program
33162 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33164 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33171 \begin_layout Standard
33177 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33178 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33180 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33185 by adding options, see section
33186 \begin_inset space ~
33190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33192 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33197 The available options are listed and explained in
33198 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33200 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33208 \begin_layout Section
33210 \begin_inset Index idx
33213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33220 \begin_inset Index idx
33223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33224 Document ! Branches
33230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33232 name "sec:Branches"
33239 \begin_layout Standard
33240 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33241 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33242 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33243 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33246 \begin_layout Standard
33247 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33248 allows you to put text into branches.
33249 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33250 To create a branch, either select the menu
33252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33253 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33256 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33265 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33266 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33267 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33268 and whether the name of the branch should
33269 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33270 (see below for an example).
33271 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33272 to the name of the other) and to add
33273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33285 \begin_inset space ~
33288 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33289 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33292 \begin_layout Standard
33293 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33294 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33299 where you can choose a branch.
33300 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33304 \begin_layout Standard
33305 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33306 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33310 \begin_inset Branch Question
33314 \begin_layout Standard
33319 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33327 \begin_layout Standard
33328 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33332 \begin_layout Standard
33337 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33345 \begin_layout Standard
33352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33353 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33356 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33357 Consider for example a file
33358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33365 which has the above branches.
33367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33374 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33398 branch were inactive,
33399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33414 branch was active, likewise
33415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33430 branch was active, and
33431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33434 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33438 if both branches were active.
33439 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33440 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33446 \begin_layout Standard
33447 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33453 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33454 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33458 \begin_inset space ~
33466 \begin_layout Standard
33467 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33471 \begin_layout Standard
33477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33484 branch is deactivated.
33490 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33496 \begin_layout Standard
33497 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33498 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33499 definitions for each branch.
33500 For example you can define for the question branch
33504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33506 -syntax, see section
33507 \begin_inset space ~
33511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33513 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33525 \begin_layout Standard
33535 \begin_layout Standard
33545 \begin_layout Standard
33546 and for the answer branch
33549 \begin_layout Standard
33559 \begin_layout Standard
33569 \begin_layout Standard
33570 \begin_inset Branch Question
33574 \begin_layout Standard
33578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33606 \begin_layout Standard
33607 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33611 \begin_layout Standard
33615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33643 \begin_layout Standard
33644 Now it is possible to use the
33648 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33655 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33658 commands to obtain conditional output.
33659 Here is an example formula where only the
33666 \begin_inset Formula
33668 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33676 \begin_layout Standard
33677 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33685 \begin_layout Standard
33686 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33688 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33692 \begin_inset space \space{}
33695 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33697 For this advanced usage, see the
33703 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33708 \begin_layout Section
33710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33712 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33717 \begin_inset Index idx
33720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33729 \begin_layout Standard
33732 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33733 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33736 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33738 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33744 \begin_inset Index idx
33747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33749 packages ! hyperref
33754 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33755 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33756 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33757 part of the document.
33761 \begin_layout Standard
33762 The header information in the dialog tab
33766 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33767 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33768 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33769 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33777 \begin_inset space ~
33782 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33783 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33784 and author entries.
33788 \begin_inset space ~
33792 \begin_inset space ~
33796 \begin_inset space ~
33801 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33804 \begin_layout Standard
33805 You can specify in the dialog tab
33809 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33814 \begin_inset space ~
33818 \begin_inset space ~
33822 \begin_inset space ~
33827 option allows long links to be split;
33830 \begin_inset space ~
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33846 \begin_inset space ~
33851 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33854 \begin_inset space ~
33859 colors the different links.
33860 The default colors are:
33863 \begin_layout Labeling
33864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33869 for hyperlinks and URLs
33872 \begin_layout Labeling
33873 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33881 \begin_layout Labeling
33882 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33890 \begin_layout Standard
33891 but you can change these in the field
33896 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33899 \begin_layout Standard
33902 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33905 \begin_layout Standard
33910 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33911 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33912 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33915 \begin_layout Standard
33920 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33921 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33922 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33932 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33933 when opening the PDF.
33935 \begin_inset space ~
33938 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33939 \begin_inset space ~
33942 1 will only display the sections.
33945 \begin_layout Standard
33946 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33947 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33953 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
33954 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33964 \begin_layout Section
33966 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33970 name "sec:TeX-Code"
33977 \begin_layout Subsection
33980 \begin_inset Index idx
33983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33993 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34000 \begin_layout Standard
34001 As \SpecialChar LyX
34002 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34003 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34004 commands and constructs,
34007 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34008 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34009 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34010 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34011 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34012 cannot support all packages and
34016 \begin_layout Standard
34017 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34018 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34019 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34023 Code box is created by the menu
34025 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34027 \begin_inset space ~
34032 or by the toolbar button
34045 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34053 \begin_layout Standard
34054 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34056 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34058 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34063 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34068 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34075 , you can write the command part
34081 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34082 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34086 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34087 Code box behind the word.
34088 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34089 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34093 \begin_layout Standard
34094 \begin_inset Graphics
34095 filename clipart/ERT.png
34103 \begin_layout Standard
34107 \begin_layout Standard
34108 This is a line with a
34112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34135 \begin_layout Standard
34136 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34144 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34145 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34146 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34147 know that the command is finished.
34155 \begin_layout Subsection
34156 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34158 \begin_inset Argument 1
34161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34162 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34169 \begin_inset Index idx
34172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34182 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34189 \begin_layout Standard
34190 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34191 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34192 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34193 uses in the background.
34194 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34195 is based on commands, you can
34196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34204 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34205 any time if you know the right commands.
34206 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34207 is the end of the day.
34208 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34209 all caption labels bold.
34210 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34212 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34216 \begin_layout Standard
34217 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34219 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34221 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34224 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34234 \begin_layout Standard
34235 As result you find that the package
34240 \begin_inset Index idx
34243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34251 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34253 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34256 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34260 \begin_inset space ~
34268 \begin_layout Standard
34273 usepackage[options]{package name}
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34278 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34279 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34280 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34283 \begin_layout Standard
34284 In your case the package name is
34289 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34294 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34295 So you add the command
34298 \begin_layout Standard
34303 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34306 \begin_layout Standard
34307 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34312 For more commands provided by the
34316 package, have a look at its documentation,
34317 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34332 \begin_layout Standard
34333 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34335 For example if you use a
34339 class, you don't need the package
34343 , you can instead write
34346 \begin_layout Standard
34351 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34356 \begin_layout Standard
34357 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34358 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34359 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34366 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34369 \begin_layout Standard
34370 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34371 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34373 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34374 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34375 Code box as described in the previous
34379 \begin_layout Standard
34380 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34381 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34384 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34386 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34394 \begin_layout Standard
34395 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34401 \begin_layout Standard
34405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34415 \begin_inset Note Note
34418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34419 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34427 \begin_layout Left Header
34428 \begin_inset Argument 1
34431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34451 \begin_inset Note Note
34454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34455 defines the header line as described below
34463 \begin_layout Center Header
34464 \begin_inset Argument 1
34467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34476 \begin_layout Right Header
34477 \begin_inset Argument 1
34480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34501 \begin_layout Left Footer
34502 \begin_inset Argument 1
34505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34526 \begin_layout Center Footer
34527 \begin_inset Argument 1
34530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34542 \begin_inset Newline newline
34546 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34552 \begin_layout Right Footer
34553 \begin_inset Argument 1
34556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34578 \begin_layout Section
34579 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34582 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34587 \begin_inset Index idx
34590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34591 Document ! Header/Footer line
34597 \begin_inset Index idx
34600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34609 \begin_layout Standard
34610 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34614 \begin_inset space ~
34625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34631 \begin_inset space ~
34637 As a second step add in the menu
34639 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34640 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34649 Custom Header/Footerlines
34652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34656 This module offers the following 6
34657 \begin_inset space ~
34663 \begin_layout Description
34665 \begin_inset space ~
34669 \begin_inset space ~
34673 \begin_inset space ~
34677 \begin_inset space ~
34681 \begin_inset space ~
34687 \begin_layout Description
34689 \begin_inset space ~
34693 \begin_inset space ~
34697 \begin_inset space ~
34701 \begin_inset space ~
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34711 \begin_layout Standard
34712 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34713 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34716 \begin_layout Standard
34717 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34718 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34720 \begin_inset space ~
34724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34726 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34730 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34733 \begin_layout Standard
34734 \begin_inset Float figure
34740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34743 \begin_inset Tabular
34744 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34745 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34746 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34747 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34748 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34750 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34768 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34779 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34797 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34808 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34812 The normal text on the page goes here.
34813 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34815 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34816 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34821 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34830 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34841 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34859 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34870 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34888 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34906 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34911 name "fig:Page-layout"
34915 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34928 \begin_layout Standard
34929 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34937 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34941 \begin_inset space ~
34946 is set to “Default”.
34947 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
34956 \begin_layout Subsection
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34961 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
34962 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
34963 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
34964 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
34966 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
34968 Defining the footer line works similarly.
34971 \begin_layout Standard
34972 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
34973 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
34977 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34979 \begin_inset space ~
34987 \begin_layout Description
34990 thepage prints the current page number
34993 \begin_layout Description
34996 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
34999 \begin_layout Description
35002 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35005 \begin_layout Description
35008 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35009 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35012 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35016 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35019 because it usually goes in a left header.
35022 \begin_layout Description
35025 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35026 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35028 It is normally used in the right header.
35031 \begin_layout Subsection
35032 Default header/footer
35035 \begin_layout Standard
35036 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35037 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35038 footer has the page number.
35039 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35040 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35041 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35052 \begin_layout Subsection
35056 \begin_layout Standard
35057 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35058 Some pages are different.
35059 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35060 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35061 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35062 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35063 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35067 Header and footer decoration line
35070 \begin_layout Standard
35071 By default, you get a 0.4
35072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35075 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35076 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35088 in the following way:
35091 \begin_layout Standard
35098 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35101 \begin_layout Standard
35102 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35115 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35122 \begin_layout Standard
35123 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35125 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35126 \begin_inset space ~
35130 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35140 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35141 Several header/footer lines
35144 \begin_layout Standard
35145 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35146 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35147 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35149 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35164 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35165 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35167 \begin_inset space ~
35175 \begin_layout Standard
35182 headheight}{height}
35185 \begin_layout Standard
35190 is a size in standard units (e.
35191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35195 \begin_inset space \space{}
35203 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35204 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35205 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35206 logfile with the menu
35208 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35210 \begin_inset space ~
35218 \begin_inset space ~
35223 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35228 \begin_inset Index idx
35231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35233 packages ! fancyhdr
35239 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35240 for your header/footer.
35243 \begin_layout Subsection
35247 \begin_layout Standard
35248 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35249 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35250 This example consists of the following definition:
35253 \begin_layout Description
35255 \begin_inset space ~
35264 , empty optional argument
35267 \begin_layout Description
35269 \begin_inset space ~
35272 Header empty, empty optional argument
35275 \begin_layout Description
35277 \begin_inset space ~
35286 in the optional argument
35289 \begin_layout Description
35291 \begin_inset space ~
35300 in the optional argument
35303 \begin_layout Description
35305 \begin_inset space ~
35318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35322 \begin_inset Newline newline
35326 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35333 in the optional argument
35336 \begin_layout Description
35338 \begin_inset space ~
35347 , empty optional argument
35350 \begin_layout Description
35353 headrulewidth set to 2
35354 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35360 \begin_layout Standard
35361 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35362 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35368 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35378 \begin_layout Standard
35379 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35385 \begin_layout Standard
35389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35393 pagestyle{headings}
35399 \begin_inset Note Note
35402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35403 switches back to page style with the default headings
35411 \begin_layout Section
35412 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35415 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35420 \begin_inset Index idx
35423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35430 \begin_inset Index idx
35433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35442 \begin_layout Standard
35444 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35445 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35446 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35449 \begin_layout Subsection
35453 \begin_layout Standard
35454 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35460 \begin_inset Index idx
35463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35465 packages ! preview-latex
35470 (on some systems named simply
35475 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35477 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35484 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35486 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35494 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35495 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35496 -package are automatically
35497 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35501 \begin_layout Subsection
35505 \begin_layout Standard
35506 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35507 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35509 activate the option
35512 \begin_inset space ~
35519 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35525 \begin_inset space ~
35529 \begin_inset space ~
35532 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35539 \begin_inset space ~
35552 \begin_inset space ~
35557 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35560 \begin_layout Standard
35561 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35566 \begin_inset space ~
35574 \begin_inset space ~
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35583 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35584 and when you finish
35588 \begin_layout Standard
35589 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35597 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35598 generated by activating the option
35601 \begin_inset space ~
35607 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35615 \begin_layout Subsection
35616 Selected document parts
35619 \begin_layout Standard
35620 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35621 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35622 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35623 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35625 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35631 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35632 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35633 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35636 \begin_layout Standard
35637 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35644 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35656 is explained in section
35658 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35663 \begin_inset space ~
35673 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35674 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35675 the final rotated boxes,
35676 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35677 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35679 Here is the result:
35682 \begin_layout Standard
35683 \begin_inset Preview
35685 \begin_layout Standard
35690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35694 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35700 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35710 height_special "totalheight"
35715 backgroundcolor "none"
35718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35743 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35749 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35771 \begin_layout Standard
35772 Previewing works also for colors.
35773 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35792 is explained in section
35799 \begin_inset space ~
35812 \begin_layout Standard
35813 \begin_inset Preview
35815 \begin_layout Standard
35819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35838 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35843 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35862 \begin_layout Standard
35863 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35869 \begin_layout Standard
35870 If \SpecialChar LyX
35871 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35872 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35873 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35874 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35875 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35876 the \SpecialChar TeX
35878 If \SpecialChar LyX
35879 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35880 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35882 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35883 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35884 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35887 \begin_layout Subsection
35892 \begin_layout Standard
35893 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35894 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35897 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35899 \begin_inset space ~
35904 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35906 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35908 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35909 's main window, then only this selection
35910 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35911 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35912 the source view window.
35917 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35918 ; but note that if you have
35919 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35921 not just the one which is open at the time.
35924 \begin_layout Section
35925 Advanced Find and Replace
35926 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35928 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35933 \begin_inset Index idx
35936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35943 \begin_inset Index idx
35946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35955 \begin_layout Subsection
35959 \begin_layout Standard
35960 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
35961 allows for searching of complex,
35962 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
35964 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
35965 The key-features are:
35968 \begin_layout Itemize
35969 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
35970 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
35971 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
35975 \begin_layout Itemize
35976 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
35977 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
35978 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
35979 a section heading will only be found within section headings
35982 \begin_layout Itemize
35983 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
35984 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
35985 outside of mathematics environments
35988 \begin_layout Itemize
35989 Search may be widened to a specific
35994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36001 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36002 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36009 \begin_layout Itemize
36010 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36011 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36016 \begin_inset space ~
36019 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36022 \begin_layout Subsection
36026 \begin_layout Standard
36027 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36029 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36042 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36045 ) or the toolbar button
36048 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36054 Advanced Find and Replace
36059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36063 \begin_layout Standard
36069 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36073 \begin_inset space ~
36078 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36081 arg "paragraph-break"
36085 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36086 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36090 arg "paragraph-break"
36093 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36097 searches backwards.
36100 \begin_layout Standard
36104 \begin_inset space ~
36109 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36118 \begin_inset space ~
36123 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36126 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36127 Searching for mathematics
36130 \begin_layout Standard
36131 Mathematical formulas, such as
36132 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36135 or something more complex like
36136 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36139 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36144 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36145 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36146 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36147 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36153 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36157 \begin_layout Standard
36158 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36159 This is done by switching to the
36163 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36168 This way, entering in the
36175 \begin_layout Itemize
36176 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36177 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36180 \begin_layout Itemize
36181 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36182 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36185 \begin_layout Itemize
36186 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36187 of it only within section headings.
36188 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36189 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36193 \begin_layout Itemize
36194 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36195 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36202 \begin_layout Standard
36203 The entries made in the
36207 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36210 \begin_inset space ~
36216 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36220 button or alternatively press
36223 arg "paragraph-break"
36230 while the cursor is in the
36233 \begin_inset space ~
36241 \begin_layout Standard
36242 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36244 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36248 \begin_layout Itemize
36249 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36250 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36258 with its typewriter version
36259 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36273 \begin_layout Itemize
36274 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36280 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36292 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36299 (you may want to enable the
36302 \begin_inset space ~
36310 \begin_inset space ~
36315 options and disable the
36323 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36331 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36332 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36336 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36339 , or occurrences of
36340 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36344 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36350 \begin_layout Subsection
36354 \begin_layout Standard
36355 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36360 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36362 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36364 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36374 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36380 This is done with the context menu
36382 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36383 Insert Regular Expression
36385 while the cursor is in the
36390 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36391 expression matching rules
36395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36396 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36406 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36407 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36413 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36414 same text in the document.
36415 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36416 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36419 \begin_layout Enumerate
36420 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36425 editor the fraction
36426 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36430 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36433 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36434 fractions with the given denominator.
36437 \begin_layout Enumerate
36438 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36450 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36455 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36456 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36457 Also, by inserting a
36458 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36461 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36462 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36465 \begin_layout Standard
36466 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36467 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36468 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36471 , and referring back to them through
36472 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36476 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36480 For example, try searching with the regexp
36481 \begin_inset Newline newline
36484 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36487 \begin_inset Newline newline
36490 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36493 \begin_layout Standard
36494 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36497 \begin_layout Standard
36498 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36506 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36507 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36508 sub-expressions is absolute.
36510 \begin_inset space ~
36514 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36517 always refers to the first occurrence of
36518 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36521 in all entered regexps.
36529 \begin_layout Section
36531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36533 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36538 \begin_inset Index idx
36541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36550 \begin_layout Standard
36552 has a built-in spell checker.
36555 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36562 key or the toolbar button
36565 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36568 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36569 beginning of the currently selected text.
36570 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36571 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36572 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36573 scrolled so that it is visible.
36574 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36575 n, if any could be found.
36576 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36580 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36581 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36584 \begin_layout Standard
36585 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36588 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36592 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36593 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36595 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36596 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36599 \begin_inset space ~
36607 arg "dialog-show character"
36610 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36612 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36615 \begin_layout Standard
36616 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36617 can be downloaded from here:
36618 \begin_inset Newline newline
36622 \begin_inset Flex URL
36625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36627 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36633 \begin_inset Newline newline
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36640 files for each language.
36641 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36642 \begin_inset space ~
36645 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36646 's installation subfolder
36654 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36656 \begin_inset Newline newline
36659 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36660 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36661 but in most cases these are
36677 is the language code.
36680 \begin_layout Subsection
36684 \begin_layout Standard
36687 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36688 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36690 \begin_inset space ~
36693 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36696 you can set the following things:
36699 \begin_layout Description
36701 \begin_inset space ~
36704 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36705 should use for spell checking.
36706 Depending on your platform,
36716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36717 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36718 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36733 \begin_inset space ~
36736 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36739 \begin_layout Description
36741 \begin_inset space ~
36744 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36745 will always use the given language
36746 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36749 \begin_layout Description
36751 \begin_inset space ~
36754 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36760 \begin_inset space \space{}
36764 This should normally not be needed.
36767 \begin_layout Description
36769 \begin_inset space ~
36773 \begin_inset space ~
36776 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36788 \begin_layout Description
36790 \begin_inset space ~
36793 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36794 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36795 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36796 appear in a context menu.
36797 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36801 \begin_layout Description
36803 \begin_inset space ~
36807 \begin_inset space ~
36811 \begin_inset space ~
36814 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36818 \begin_layout Section
36820 \begin_inset Index idx
36823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36830 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36832 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36839 \begin_layout Standard
36841 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36842 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36852 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36854 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36864 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36866 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36867 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36868 which are available for many languages.
36871 \begin_layout Standard
36872 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36873 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36877 \begin_layout Subsection
36878 Setting up the thesaurus
36881 \begin_layout Standard
36890 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36894 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36899 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36905 \begin_inset space ~
36913 For instance, the US English files are named:
36916 \begin_layout Itemize
36920 \begin_layout Itemize
36924 \begin_layout Standard
36933 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36934 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36937 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36938 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36939 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36941 \begin_inset space ~
36946 ) to the path where they are installed.
36950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36951 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36952 ies, typical locations are
36958 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
36962 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
36966 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
36969 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
36975 LibreOffice-<Version>
36982 On the Mac, the default location is
36984 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
36985 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36986 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
36987 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
36988 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36989 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
36997 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
36998 during the \SpecialChar LyX
36999 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37003 \begin_layout Standard
37004 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37005 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37007 \begin_inset Newline newline
37011 \begin_inset Flex URL
37014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37016 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37024 \begin_layout Standard
37025 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37026 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37028 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37029 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37030 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37032 \begin_inset space ~
37037 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37039 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37040 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37044 \begin_layout Standard
37045 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37047 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37050 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37056 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37059 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37060 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37068 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37069 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37070 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37072 \begin_inset space ~
37077 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37080 \begin_layout Subsection
37081 Using the thesaurus
37084 \begin_layout Standard
37085 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37087 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37090 or the toolbar button
37093 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37096 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37098 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37100 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37101 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37102 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37111 ), related terms (such as
37114 \begin_inset space ~
37123 ), compounds (such as
37126 \begin_inset space ~
37135 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37144 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37147 \begin_layout Standard
37148 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37149 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37153 \begin_layout Standard
37154 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37155 the dictionary, such as the above
37159 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37160 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37164 \begin_inset space \space{}
37167 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37168 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37169 For example, looking up the word form
37173 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37178 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37183 \begin_inset space \space{}
37194 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37195 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37196 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37199 \begin_layout Section
37201 \begin_inset Index idx
37204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37211 \begin_inset Index idx
37214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37215 Document ! Change Tracking
37221 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37223 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37230 \begin_layout Standard
37231 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37232 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37233 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37234 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37236 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37238 \begin_inset space ~
37241 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37243 \begin_inset space ~
37251 \begin_layout Standard
37252 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37266 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37267 You can change the color in
37269 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37270 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37272 \begin_inset space ~
37276 \begin_inset space ~
37281 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37287 \begin_inset Index idx
37290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37291 Color ! Change tracking
37296 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37297 's status bar when the
37298 cursor is in changed text.
37299 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37302 arg "changes-merge"
37308 \begin_layout Standard
37309 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37311 \begin_inset Index idx
37314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37323 \begin_layout Standard
37324 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37330 \begin_layout Standard
37331 \begin_inset Graphics
37332 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37340 \begin_layout Standard
37341 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37347 \begin_layout Standard
37348 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37351 \begin_layout Standard
37352 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37358 \begin_layout Standard
37359 \begin_inset Tabular
37360 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37361 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37362 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37363 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37373 arg "changes-track"
37381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37387 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37389 \begin_inset space ~
37392 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37394 \begin_inset space ~
37403 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37412 arg "changes-output"
37420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37426 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37428 \begin_inset space ~
37431 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37433 \begin_inset space ~
37437 \begin_inset space ~
37441 \begin_inset space ~
37450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37471 Jumps to the next change
37477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37486 arg "change-accept"
37494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37502 \begin_inset space ~
37505 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37507 \begin_inset space ~
37516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37525 arg "change-reject"
37533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37541 \begin_inset space ~
37544 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37546 \begin_inset space ~
37555 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37564 arg "changes-merge"
37572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37580 \begin_inset space ~
37583 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37585 \begin_inset space ~
37594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37603 arg "all-changes-accept"
37611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37617 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37619 \begin_inset space ~
37622 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37624 \begin_inset space ~
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37637 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37646 arg "all-changes-reject"
37654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37660 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37662 \begin_inset space ~
37665 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37667 \begin_inset space ~
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37703 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37704 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37706 \begin_inset space ~
37715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37738 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37740 \begin_inset space ~
37756 \begin_layout Standard
37757 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37763 \begin_layout Standard
37764 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37784 \begin_layout Standard
37785 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37786 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37787 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37788 the next change after the current cursor position.
37789 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37790 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37791 step to the next change.
37792 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37797 to describe a change.
37800 \begin_layout Standard
37801 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37807 \begin_inset Index idx
37810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37818 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37820 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37827 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37831 \begin_layout Section
37832 Comparison of Documents
37833 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37835 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37840 \begin_inset Index idx
37843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37844 Comparison of documents
37852 \begin_layout Standard
37853 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37856 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37860 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37861 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37863 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37865 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37869 \begin_inset space ~
37873 \begin_inset space ~
37877 \begin_inset space ~
37886 \begin_inset space ~
37890 \begin_inset space ~
37894 \begin_inset space ~
37898 \begin_inset space ~
37902 \begin_inset space ~
37906 \begin_inset space ~
37911 enables the change tracking option
37914 \begin_inset space ~
37918 \begin_inset space ~
37922 \begin_inset space ~
37927 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37930 \begin_layout Section
37931 International Support
37932 \begin_inset Index idx
37935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37936 International support
37944 \begin_layout Standard
37945 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37946 with any language you want.
37947 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37948 up \SpecialChar LyX
37950 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37952 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
37960 \begin_layout Standard
37961 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
37962 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
37963 \begin_inset space ~
37967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37969 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
37976 \begin_layout Subsection
37978 \begin_inset Index idx
37981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37988 \begin_inset Index idx
37991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37992 Document ! Settings
37998 \begin_inset Index idx
38001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38002 Document ! Language
38010 \begin_layout Standard
38013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38014 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38017 dialog lets you set
38019 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38024 \begin_layout Standard
38029 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38034 \begin_inset space ~
38039 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38040 For details about the different encoding options see section
38041 \begin_inset space ~
38045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38047 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38054 \begin_layout Subsection
38055 Keyboard mapping configuration
38056 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38058 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38065 \begin_layout Standard
38066 If you have for example a U.
38067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38070 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38071 can use an alternate keymap.
38072 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38077 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38078 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38079 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38082 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38083 \begin_inset space ~
38087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38089 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38094 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38095 which one you want to use.
38098 \begin_layout Standard
38099 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38100 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38101 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38102 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38105 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38106 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38107 one to support the characters you want.
38108 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38115 \begin_layout Chapter
38118 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38120 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38127 \begin_layout Standard
38128 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38129 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38130 topic inside the user's guide.
38133 \begin_layout Section
38135 \begin_inset Index idx
38138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38147 \begin_layout Standard
38152 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38155 \begin_layout Subsection
38159 \begin_layout Standard
38160 Creates a new document.
38163 \begin_layout Subsection
38167 \begin_layout Standard
38168 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38169 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38170 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38173 \begin_layout Subsection
38177 \begin_layout Standard
38181 \begin_layout Subsection
38185 \begin_layout Standard
38186 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38187 Click there on a file to open it.
38190 \begin_layout Subsection
38194 \begin_layout Standard
38195 Closes the current document.
38198 \begin_layout Subsection
38202 \begin_layout Standard
38203 Closes all opened documents.
38206 \begin_layout Subsection
38210 \begin_layout Standard
38211 Saves the actual document.
38214 \begin_layout Subsection
38218 \begin_layout Standard
38219 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38222 \begin_layout Subsection
38226 \begin_layout Standard
38227 Saves all opened documents.
38230 \begin_layout Subsection
38234 \begin_layout Standard
38235 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38238 \begin_layout Subsection
38242 \begin_layout Standard
38243 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38244 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38245 It is described in the section
38247 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38252 Additional Features
38257 \begin_layout Subsection
38261 \begin_layout Standard
38262 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38263 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38265 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38266 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38270 \begin_layout Standard
38271 When using the menu entry
38274 \begin_inset space ~
38279 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38283 \begin_inset space ~
38287 \begin_inset space ~
38291 \begin_inset space ~
38296 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38297 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38300 \begin_layout Subsection
38302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38304 name "subsec:Export"
38311 \begin_layout Standard
38312 You can export your document to various file formats.
38313 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38315 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38316 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38317 during its configuration.
38320 \begin_layout Standard
38321 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38323 \begin_inset space ~
38327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38329 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38336 \begin_layout Description
38342 \begin_inset space ~
38345 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38347 \begin_inset space ~
38350 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38351 \begin_inset Newline newline
38354 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38355 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38359 \begin_layout Description
38360 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38366 \begin_layout Description
38368 \begin_inset space ~
38371 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38377 \begin_layout Description
38378 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38379 's native DVI-format.
38380 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38381 files paths or file names in your document.
38383 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38390 \begin_layout Description
38391 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38392 in files paths or file names
38395 \begin_layout Description
38397 \begin_inset space ~
38404 ) DVI-format using the program
38406 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38409 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38413 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38421 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38429 \begin_layout Description
38431 \begin_inset space ~
38434 (cropped) the same as
38438 but with cropped page margins.
38441 \begin_layout Description
38443 \begin_inset space ~
38446 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38450 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38455 \begin_layout Description
38459 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38467 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38475 \begin_layout Description
38477 \begin_inset space ~
38481 \begin_inset space ~
38484 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38488 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38496 \begin_layout Description
38500 \begin_inset space ~
38509 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38510 source that is compilable with the program
38512 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38516 \begin_layout Description
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38525 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38526 source, additionally all images used in the document
38527 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38531 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38534 \begin_layout Description
38538 \begin_inset space ~
38543 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38544 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38545 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38553 \begin_layout Description
38557 \begin_inset space ~
38566 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38567 source that is compilable with the program
38573 \begin_layout Description
38575 \begin_inset space ~
38579 \begin_inset space ~
38586 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38587 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38593 \begin_layout Description
38595 \begin_inset space ~
38598 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38599 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38601 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38605 \begin_inset space \space{}
38610 \begin_inset space ~
38614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38629 represent the version number)
38632 \begin_layout Description
38634 \begin_inset space ~
38638 \begin_inset space ~
38641 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38642 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38643 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38647 \begin_layout Description
38648 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38649 's internal XHTML engine
38652 \begin_layout Description
38654 \begin_inset space ~
38658 \begin_inset space ~
38662 \begin_inset space ~
38666 \begin_inset space ~
38669 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38674 For the conversion the program
38683 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38686 \begin_layout Description
38687 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38692 \begin_layout Description
38694 \begin_inset space ~
38697 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38699 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38702 For the conversion the program
38711 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38714 \begin_layout Description
38716 \begin_inset space ~
38719 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38720 For the conversion the program
38729 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38732 \begin_layout Description
38734 \begin_inset space ~
38737 (cropped) the same as
38740 \begin_inset space ~
38745 but with cropped page margins
38748 \begin_layout Description
38752 \begin_inset space ~
38757 PDF-format using the program
38761 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38764 \begin_layout Description
38768 \begin_inset space ~
38772 \begin_inset space ~
38780 \begin_inset space ~
38785 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38790 \begin_inset space \space{}
38793 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38797 \begin_layout Description
38801 \begin_inset space ~
38806 PDF-format using the program
38808 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38811 , produces PDF-files directly
38814 \begin_layout Description
38818 \begin_inset space ~
38823 PDF-format using the program
38827 , produces PDF-files directly
38830 \begin_layout Description
38834 \begin_inset space ~
38839 PDF-format using the program
38843 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38846 \begin_layout Description
38850 \begin_inset space ~
38855 PDF-format using the program
38860 , produces PDF-files directly
38863 \begin_layout Description
38867 \begin_inset space ~
38875 \begin_layout Description
38879 \begin_inset space ~
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38888 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38889 and then exported as text using the program
38894 \begin_layout Description
38899 PostScript format using the program
38907 options see section
38908 \begin_inset space ~
38912 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38914 reference "subsec:General-output"
38921 \begin_layout Description
38922 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38923 source and also code in the statistical programming
38937 it is possible to use
38941 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38945 \begin_layout Standard
38946 If one of the menu entries
38953 \begin_inset space ~
38962 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38964 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
38966 \begin_inset space ~
38970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38972 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38977 \begin_inset Index idx
38980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38981 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38990 \begin_layout Subsection
38994 \begin_layout Standard
38995 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
38996 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
38999 \begin_inset space ~
39003 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39005 reference "sec:Paths"
39010 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39019 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39020 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39021 's preferences as described in section
39022 \begin_inset space ~
39026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39028 reference "subsec:Converters"
39035 \begin_layout Subsection
39036 New and Close Window
39039 \begin_layout Standard
39040 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39044 \begin_layout Subsection
39048 \begin_layout Standard
39049 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39052 \begin_layout Section
39054 \begin_inset Index idx
39057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39066 \begin_layout Subsection
39070 \begin_layout Standard
39071 Described in section
39072 \begin_inset space ~
39076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39078 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39085 \begin_layout Subsection
39086 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39089 \begin_layout Standard
39090 Described in section
39091 \begin_inset space ~
39095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39097 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39104 \begin_layout Subsection
39108 \begin_layout Standard
39109 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39110 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39113 \begin_layout Subsection
39117 \begin_layout Standard
39118 Selects the whole document.
39121 \begin_layout Subsection
39122 Find & Replace (Quick)
39125 \begin_layout Standard
39126 Described in section
39127 \begin_inset space ~
39131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39133 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39140 \begin_layout Subsection
39141 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39144 \begin_layout Standard
39145 Described in section
39146 \begin_inset space ~
39150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39152 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39159 \begin_layout Subsection
39160 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39163 \begin_layout Standard
39164 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39168 \begin_layout Subsection
39170 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39174 \begin_layout Standard
39176 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39177 Described in section
39178 \begin_inset space ~
39182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39184 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39193 \begin_layout Subsection
39195 \begin_inset Index idx
39198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39199 Paragraph ! Settings
39207 \begin_layout Standard
39208 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39209 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39213 \begin_layout Standard
39214 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39215 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39221 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39222 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39224 \begin_inset space ~
39230 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39234 \begin_layout Subsection
39236 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39240 \begin_layout Standard
39242 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39243 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39248 \begin_layout Enumerate
39250 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39251 Customize text properties by means of the
39257 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39260 ; this is described in section
39261 \begin_inset space ~
39265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39267 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39274 \begin_layout Enumerate
39276 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39277 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39279 Apply last settings
39282 \begin_layout Enumerate
39284 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39285 Change the casing of selected text (
39300 \begin_layout Subsection
39302 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39306 \begin_layout Standard
39308 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39309 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39310 text styles (in the case of this document:
39332 \begin_inset space ~
39336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39338 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39347 \begin_layout Subsection
39348 Table and Rows & Columns
39351 \begin_layout Standard
39352 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39353 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39354 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39357 \begin_layout Subsection
39361 \begin_layout Standard
39362 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39363 It will dissolve this inset.
39364 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39368 \begin_layout Subsection
39372 \begin_layout Standard
39373 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39374 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39377 \begin_layout Subsection
39378 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39381 \begin_layout Standard
39382 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39384 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39385 \begin_inset space ~
39389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39391 reference "sec:Nesting"
39396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39398 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39405 \begin_layout Section
39407 \begin_inset Index idx
39410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39419 \begin_layout Standard
39420 At the bottom of the
39424 menu the opened documents are listed.
39427 \begin_layout Subsection
39428 Open/Close all Insets
39431 \begin_layout Standard
39432 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39435 \begin_layout Subsection
39436 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39439 \begin_layout Standard
39440 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39443 \begin_layout Standard
39444 Math macros are described in the
39451 \begin_layout Subsection
39455 \begin_layout Standard
39456 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39457 \begin_inset space ~
39461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39463 reference "sec:Navigating"
39468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39470 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39477 \begin_layout Subsection
39481 \begin_layout Standard
39482 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39484 \begin_inset space ~
39488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39490 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39497 \begin_layout Subsection
39501 \begin_layout Standard
39502 Opens a window showing console messages.
39503 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39508 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39509 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39510 is processing the document.
39513 \begin_layout Subsection
39515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39517 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39522 \begin_inset Index idx
39525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39534 \begin_layout Standard
39535 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39537 All toolbars and the
39540 \begin_inset space ~
39545 can be turned on and off.
39550 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39562 \begin_inset space ~
39574 \begin_inset space ~
39579 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39583 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39590 \begin_layout Standard
39595 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39599 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39600 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39601 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39602 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39603 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39606 \begin_layout Standard
39608 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39609 \begin_inset space ~
39613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39615 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39622 \begin_layout Subsection
39626 \begin_layout Standard
39630 \begin_inset space ~
39634 \begin_inset space ~
39638 \begin_inset space ~
39642 \begin_inset space ~
39646 \begin_inset space ~
39650 \begin_inset space ~
39655 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39656 's main window vertically while
39659 \begin_inset space ~
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39667 \begin_inset space ~
39671 \begin_inset space ~
39675 \begin_inset space ~
39679 \begin_inset space ~
39684 will split it horizontally.
39685 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39686 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39687 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39688 three or more documents at the same time.
39689 To close a split view, use the menu
39692 \begin_inset space ~
39696 \begin_inset space ~
39704 \begin_layout Subsection
39708 \begin_layout Standard
39709 Closes a split view.
39712 \begin_layout Subsection
39716 \begin_layout Standard
39717 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39718 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39719 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39720 's main window fullscreen.
39721 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39722 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39725 \begin_layout Section
39727 \begin_inset Index idx
39730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 \begin_layout Subsection
39743 \begin_layout Standard
39744 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39745 \begin_inset space ~
39749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39751 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39762 \begin_layout Subsection
39764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39766 name "subsec:Special-Character"
39773 \begin_layout Standard
39774 Here you can insert the following characters:
39777 \begin_layout Description
39782 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
39785 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
39786 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39787 -packages you have installed.
39788 You can get a complete display by checking
39791 \begin_inset space ~
39797 \begin_inset Newline newline
39801 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39809 Not all characters will be visible in the
39813 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39814 dialog (see section
39815 \begin_inset space ~
39819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39821 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39825 ) can display every character.
39833 \begin_layout Description
39834 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39838 \begin_layout Description
39840 \begin_inset space ~
39844 \begin_inset space ~
39847 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
39848 \begin_inset space ~
39852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39854 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
39861 \begin_layout Description
39863 \begin_inset space ~
39866 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39870 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39876 \begin_layout Description
39878 \begin_inset space ~
39881 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39885 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39891 \begin_layout Description
39893 \begin_inset space ~
39896 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39900 \begin_layout Description
39902 \begin_inset space ~
39905 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39909 \begin_layout Description
39911 \begin_inset space ~
39914 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39920 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39926 \begin_layout Description
39928 \begin_inset space ~
39931 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39935 \begin_layout Description
39937 \begin_inset space ~
39941 \begin_inset Index idx
39944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39951 \begin_inset Index idx
39954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39955 Language ! Phonetic symbols
39960 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
39961 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
39963 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39969 \begin_inset Index idx
39972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39980 \begin_inset Newline newline
39983 More information about this feature can be found in the
39989 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
39995 \begin_layout Description
39996 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
39998 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
39999 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40003 \begin_layout Subsection
40007 \begin_layout Standard
40008 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40011 \begin_layout Description
40012 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40013 \begin_inset script superscript
40015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40024 \begin_layout Description
40025 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40026 \begin_inset script subscript
40028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40037 \begin_layout Description
40039 \begin_inset space ~
40042 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40043 \begin_inset space ~
40047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40049 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40056 \begin_layout Description
40058 \begin_inset space ~
40061 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40068 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40075 \begin_layout Description
40077 \begin_inset space ~
40080 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40081 \begin_inset space ~
40085 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40087 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40094 \begin_layout Description
40096 \begin_inset space ~
40099 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40105 \begin_inset space \space{}
40108 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40109 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40118 To insert a fraction use the command
40123 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40127 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40133 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40136 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40143 \begin_layout Description
40145 \begin_inset space ~
40148 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40149 \begin_inset space ~
40153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40155 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40162 \begin_layout Description
40164 \begin_inset space ~
40167 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40168 \begin_inset space ~
40172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40174 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40181 \begin_layout Description
40183 \begin_inset space ~
40186 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40193 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40200 \begin_layout Description
40201 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40202 \begin_inset space ~
40206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40208 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40215 \begin_layout Description
40217 \begin_inset space ~
40220 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40227 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40234 \begin_layout Description
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40239 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40240 \begin_inset space ~
40244 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40246 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40253 \begin_layout Description
40255 \begin_inset space ~
40259 \begin_inset space ~
40262 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40265 \begin_inset space ~
40269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40271 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40278 for a usage example.
40281 \begin_layout Description
40283 \begin_inset space ~
40287 \begin_inset space ~
40290 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40297 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40304 \begin_layout Description
40306 \begin_inset space ~
40309 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40310 as described in section
40311 \begin_inset space ~
40315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40317 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40324 \begin_layout Description
40326 \begin_inset space ~
40329 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40330 \begin_inset space ~
40334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40336 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40343 \begin_layout Description
40345 \begin_inset space ~
40348 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40349 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40351 \begin_inset space ~
40355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40357 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40364 \begin_layout Description
40366 \begin_inset space ~
40369 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40370 \begin_inset space ~
40374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40376 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40383 \begin_layout Description
40385 \begin_inset space ~
40389 \begin_inset space ~
40392 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40393 \begin_inset space ~
40397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40399 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40406 \begin_layout Subsection
40408 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40412 \begin_layout Standard
40414 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40415 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40416 The submenu allows you to insert
40419 \begin_layout Description
40421 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40423 \begin_inset space ~
40426 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40429 \begin_layout Description
40431 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40433 \begin_inset space ~
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40440 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40444 \begin_layout Description
40446 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40451 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40454 \begin_layout Description
40456 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40458 \begin_inset space ~
40461 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40464 \begin_layout Description
40466 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40468 \begin_inset space ~
40472 \begin_inset space ~
40475 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40479 \begin_layout Description
40481 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40483 \begin_inset space ~
40486 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40489 \begin_layout Description
40491 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40497 \begin_inset space ~
40501 \begin_inset space ~
40504 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40507 \begin_layout Description
40509 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40511 \begin_inset space ~
40514 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40516 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40517 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40523 \begin_layout Description
40525 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40527 \begin_inset space ~
40530 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40532 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40533 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40539 \begin_layout Description
40541 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40542 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40543 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40544 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40547 \begin_layout Subsection
40551 \begin_layout Standard
40552 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40556 \begin_inset space ~
40577 are described in section
40578 \begin_inset space ~
40582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40584 reference "sec:toc"
40593 is described in section
40594 \begin_inset space ~
40598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40600 reference "sec:Index"
40608 is described in section
40609 \begin_inset space ~
40613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40615 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40621 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40624 is described in section
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40631 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40638 \begin_layout Subsection
40642 \begin_layout Standard
40643 To insert floats, as described in section
40644 \begin_inset space ~
40648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40650 reference "sec:Floats"
40654 and in detail the chapter
40661 \begin_inset space ~
40669 \begin_layout Subsection
40673 \begin_layout Standard
40674 To insert notes, described in section
40675 \begin_inset space ~
40679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40681 reference "sec:Notes"
40688 \begin_layout Subsection
40692 \begin_layout Standard
40693 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40695 Branches are described in section
40696 \begin_inset space ~
40700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40702 reference "sec:Branches"
40709 \begin_layout Subsection
40713 \begin_layout Standard
40714 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40715 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40717 An example is the document class
40718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40725 with three custom insets.
40728 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40732 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40738 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40741 \begin_layout Subsection
40743 \begin_inset Index idx
40746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40755 \begin_layout Standard
40756 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40758 For more information see chapter
40760 External Document Parts
40763 \begin_inset space ~
40769 \begin_layout Subsection
40771 \begin_inset Index idx
40774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40783 \begin_layout Standard
40784 Inserts a box in a certain style.
40785 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
40792 \begin_inset space ~
40800 \begin_layout Subsection
40804 \begin_layout Standard
40809 dialog as described in section
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40816 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40823 \begin_layout Subsection
40827 \begin_layout Standard
40832 as described in section
40833 \begin_inset space ~
40837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40839 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40846 \begin_layout Subsection
40850 \begin_layout Standard
40855 as described in section
40856 \begin_inset space ~
40860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40862 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40869 \begin_layout Subsection
40871 \begin_inset Index idx
40874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40881 \begin_inset Index idx
40884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40885 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
40893 \begin_layout Standard
40894 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
40895 Floats are described in section
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40902 reference "sec:Floats"
40906 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
40908 Multi-page Captions
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40921 \begin_layout Subsection
40925 \begin_layout Standard
40926 Inserts an index entry as described in section
40927 \begin_inset space ~
40931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40933 reference "sec:Index"
40940 \begin_layout Subsection
40944 \begin_layout Standard
40945 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40946 \begin_inset space ~
40950 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40952 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40959 \begin_layout Subsection
40963 \begin_layout Standard
40964 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
40965 Tables are described in section
40966 \begin_inset space ~
40970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40972 reference "sec:Tables"
40976 and in detail in the chapter
40983 \begin_inset space ~
40991 \begin_layout Subsection
40995 \begin_layout Standard
41001 Graphics are described in section
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41008 reference "sec:Graphics"
41015 \begin_layout Subsection
41019 \begin_layout Standard
41020 Inserts a URL as described in section
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41027 reference "subsec:URLs"
41034 \begin_layout Subsection
41038 \begin_layout Standard
41039 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41040 \begin_inset space ~
41044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41046 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41053 \begin_layout Subsection
41057 \begin_layout Standard
41058 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41059 \begin_inset space ~
41063 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41065 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41072 \begin_layout Subsection
41076 \begin_layout Standard
41077 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41078 \begin_inset space ~
41082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41084 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41091 \begin_layout Subsection
41094 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41097 \begin_layout Standard
41098 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41099 environments of the same type.
41101 \begin_inset space ~
41105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41107 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41111 for an explanation.
41114 \begin_layout Subsection
41118 \begin_layout Standard
41119 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41120 title or caption of a float.
41121 Inserts a short title as described in section
41122 \begin_inset space ~
41126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41128 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41135 \begin_layout Subsection
41140 \begin_layout Standard
41141 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41142 Code box as described in section
41143 \begin_inset space ~
41147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41149 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41156 \begin_layout Subsection
41158 \begin_inset Index idx
41161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41170 \begin_layout Standard
41171 Inserts a program listings box.
41172 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41174 Program Code Listings
41179 \begin_inset space ~
41187 \begin_layout Subsection
41189 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41193 \begin_layout Standard
41195 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41196 Inserts the actual date.
41197 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41204 \begin_layout Subsection
41208 \begin_layout Standard
41209 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41210 \begin_inset space ~
41214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41216 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41223 \begin_layout Section
41225 \begin_inset Index idx
41228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41237 \begin_layout Standard
41238 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41239 \begin_inset space ~
41242 of the current document.
41243 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41246 \begin_layout Subsection
41250 \begin_layout Standard
41251 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41252 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41253 to jump, for example, between section
41254 \begin_inset space ~
41258 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41259 \begin_inset space ~
41262 2.5 and use the submenu
41265 \begin_inset space ~
41269 \begin_inset space ~
41276 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41292 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41296 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41302 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41305 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41308 \begin_layout Standard
41309 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41313 \begin_inset space ~
41318 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41321 \begin_inset space ~
41326 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41329 \begin_layout Subsection
41330 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41333 \begin_layout Standard
41334 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41338 \begin_layout Subsection
41342 \begin_layout Standard
41343 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41344 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41345 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41349 \begin_inset space ~
41353 \begin_inset space ~
41361 \begin_layout Subsection
41365 \begin_layout Standard
41366 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41369 The \SpecialChar LyX
41370 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41372 \begin_inset space ~
41380 \begin_inset space ~
41385 manual for a detailed description.
41388 \begin_layout Section
41390 \begin_inset Index idx
41393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41402 \begin_layout Subsection
41406 \begin_layout Standard
41407 Change Tracking is described in section
41408 \begin_inset space ~
41412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41414 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41421 \begin_layout Subsection
41429 \begin_layout Standard
41430 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41431 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41432 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41434 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41435 to the clipboard or update the view.
41436 \begin_inset Newline newline
41439 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41443 \begin_layout Standard
41446 Open Containing Directory
41448 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41449 's temporary folder for the document.
41450 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41451 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41452 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41453 For example some journals require to send the
41457 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41461 \begin_layout Subsection
41462 Start Appendix Here
41465 \begin_layout Standard
41466 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41467 as described in section
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41474 reference "sec:Appendices"
41481 \begin_layout Subsection
41483 \begin_inset space ~
41489 \begin_layout Standard
41490 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41491 default output format for the document (menu
41493 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41494 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41495 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41497 \begin_inset space ~
41501 \begin_inset space ~
41507 \begin_inset space ~
41511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41513 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41517 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41521 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41523 \begin_inset space ~
41526 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41528 \begin_inset space ~
41531 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41533 \begin_inset space ~
41537 \begin_inset space ~
41543 \begin_inset space ~
41547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41549 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41553 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41554 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41556 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41557 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41559 \begin_inset space ~
41562 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41564 \begin_inset space ~
41567 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41577 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41582 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41583 when it is first configured.
41584 The default output format is
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41595 \begin_layout Subsection
41596 View (Other Formats)
41599 \begin_layout Standard
41600 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41601 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41602 actual document with an external program.
41603 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41604 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41605 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41607 All possible formats are listed in section
41608 \begin_inset space ~
41612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41614 reference "subsec:Export"
41619 You should at least see the menu entry
41624 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41626 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41628 \begin_inset space ~
41632 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41634 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41639 \begin_inset Index idx
41642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41643 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41652 \begin_layout Standard
41653 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41654 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41656 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41657 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41662 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41664 \begin_inset space ~
41667 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41671 \begin_inset space ~
41675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41677 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41682 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41683 when it is first configured.
41686 \begin_layout Subsection
41688 \begin_inset space ~
41694 \begin_layout Standard
41695 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41696 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41699 \begin_layout Subsection
41700 Update (Other Formats)
41703 \begin_layout Standard
41704 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41705 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41708 \begin_layout Subsection
41709 View Master Document
41712 \begin_layout Standard
41713 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41729 \begin_inset space ~
41734 manual for more information on this topic).
41735 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41736 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41740 \begin_inset space ~
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41749 generates the output of the whole book, while
41753 will just output the chapter alone.
41756 \begin_layout Standard
41757 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41758 in the document settings (menu
41760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41761 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41762 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41764 \begin_inset space ~
41768 \begin_inset space ~
41774 \begin_inset space ~
41778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41780 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41784 ) or in the preferences (menu
41786 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41787 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41789 \begin_inset space ~
41792 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41794 \begin_inset space ~
41797 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41799 \begin_inset space ~
41803 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_inset space ~
41813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41815 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41822 \begin_layout Subsection
41823 Update Master Document
41826 \begin_layout Standard
41827 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41843 \begin_inset space ~
41848 manual for more information on this topic).
41849 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
41850 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
41853 \begin_layout Standard
41854 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41855 in the document settings (menu
41857 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41858 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41859 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41861 \begin_inset space ~
41865 \begin_inset space ~
41871 \begin_inset space ~
41875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41877 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41881 ) or in the preferences (menu
41883 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41884 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41886 \begin_inset space ~
41889 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41891 \begin_inset space ~
41894 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41896 \begin_inset space ~
41900 \begin_inset space ~
41906 \begin_inset space ~
41910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41912 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41919 \begin_layout Subsection
41921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41923 name "subsec:Compressed"
41930 \begin_layout Standard
41931 Un/compresses the current document.
41932 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
41933 compression (see the
41935 Additional Features
41937 manual for details).
41940 \begin_layout Subsection
41944 \begin_layout Standard
41945 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
41948 \begin_layout Subsection
41952 \begin_layout Standard
41953 The document settings are described in appendix
41954 \begin_inset space ~
41958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41960 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
41967 \begin_layout Section
41969 \begin_inset Index idx
41972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41981 \begin_layout Subsection
41985 \begin_layout Standard
41986 Spell checking is explained in section
41987 \begin_inset space ~
41991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41993 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42000 \begin_layout Subsection
42004 \begin_layout Standard
42005 The thesaurus is described in section
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42012 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42019 \begin_layout Subsection
42021 \begin_inset Index idx
42024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42031 \begin_inset Index idx
42034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42043 \begin_layout Standard
42044 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42045 the highlighted document part.
42048 \begin_layout Subsection
42054 \begin_inset Index idx
42057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42058 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42067 \begin_layout Standard
42068 Generates with the help of the program
42070 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42073 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42074 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42075 This feature is not available on Windows.
42078 \begin_layout Subsection
42084 \begin_inset Index idx
42087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42097 \begin_layout Standard
42098 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42103 \begin_inset space ~
42108 to see the full filename paths.
42111 \begin_layout Subsection
42113 \begin_inset Index idx
42116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42125 \begin_layout Standard
42126 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42127 files as described in section
42128 \begin_inset space ~
42132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42134 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42141 \begin_layout Subsection
42143 \begin_inset Index idx
42146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42159 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42177 \begin_inset Index idx
42180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42181 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42190 \begin_layout Standard
42191 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42192 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42193 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42194 -packages and programs it needs; see
42196 \begin_inset space ~
42200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42202 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42209 \begin_layout Subsection
42213 \begin_layout Standard
42218 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42219 \begin_inset space ~
42223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42225 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42232 \begin_layout Section
42234 \begin_inset Index idx
42237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42246 \begin_layout Standard
42247 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42248 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42250 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42254 \begin_layout Standard
42258 \begin_inset space ~
42263 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42264 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42265 packages and classes found
42266 by \SpecialChar LyX
42268 \begin_inset space ~
42272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42274 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42281 \begin_layout Standard
42285 \begin_inset space ~
42290 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42295 \begin_layout Section
42297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42299 name "sec:Toolbars"
42306 \begin_layout Standard
42307 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42308 \begin_inset space ~
42312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42314 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42321 \begin_layout Standard
42322 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42323 This is described in the
42325 Additional Features
42330 \begin_layout Subsection
42332 \begin_inset Index idx
42335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42344 \begin_layout Standard
42345 \begin_inset Graphics
42346 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42354 \begin_layout Standard
42355 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42361 \begin_layout Standard
42362 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42379 \begin_inset Note Note
42382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42383 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42388 manual for more information.
42396 \begin_layout Standard
42397 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42403 \begin_layout Standard
42404 \begin_inset Tabular
42405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42406 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42414 \begin_inset Graphics
42415 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42429 pull-down box for the environments
42442 \begin_layout Standard
42443 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42449 \begin_layout Standard
42451 \begin_inset Tabular
42452 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
42453 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42454 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42455 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42479 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42486 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42509 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42539 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42546 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42555 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42569 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42576 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42585 arg "spelling-continuously"
42593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42597 Spellcheck continuously
42603 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42626 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42656 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42663 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42686 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42693 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42716 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42723 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42746 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42762 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
42770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42776 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42782 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42802 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42816 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42835 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42844 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
42852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42858 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42859 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
42866 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42887 Emphasize text, function of the
42888 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
42891 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42896 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42898 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
42904 arg "dialog-show character"
42915 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42936 Set text to noun style, function of the
42937 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
42940 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42945 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42947 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
42953 arg "dialog-show character"
42964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42973 arg "textstyle-apply"
42981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42985 Format text using the current settings in the
42986 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758229
42989 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42991 \begin_inset space ~
42994 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42996 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758229
43002 arg "dialog-show character"
43013 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43036 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43037 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43039 \begin_inset space ~
43048 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43057 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43078 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43085 arg "tabular-insert"
43093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43099 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43115 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43127 Toggle outline window on/off,
43129 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43145 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43157 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43163 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43172 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43184 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43197 \begin_layout Subsection
43199 \begin_inset Index idx
43202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43211 \begin_layout Standard
43212 \begin_inset Graphics
43213 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43221 \begin_layout Standard
43222 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43228 \begin_layout Standard
43229 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43233 \begin_layout Standard
43234 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43240 \begin_layout Standard
43241 \begin_inset Tabular
43242 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
43243 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43244 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43246 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43282 arg "layout Enumerate"
43290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43309 arg "layout Itemize"
43317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43354 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43363 arg "layout Description"
43371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43390 arg "depth-increment"
43398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43404 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43406 \begin_inset space ~
43410 \begin_inset space ~
43419 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43428 arg "depth-decrement"
43436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43442 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43444 \begin_inset space ~
43448 \begin_inset space ~
43457 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43466 arg "float-insert figure"
43474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43480 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43481 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43497 arg "float-insert table"
43505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43512 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43542 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43558 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43572 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43588 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43602 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43609 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43632 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43634 \begin_inset space ~
43643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43652 arg "nomencl-insert"
43660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43668 \begin_inset space ~
43677 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43686 arg "footnote-insert"
43694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43707 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43716 arg "marginalnote-insert"
43724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43730 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43765 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
43767 \begin_inset space ~
43776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43785 arg "box-insert Frameless"
43793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43806 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43836 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43861 \begin_inset space ~
43870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43879 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
43887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43894 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43901 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43910 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
43918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43925 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43927 \begin_inset space ~
43936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43945 arg "dialog-show character"
43953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43959 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43961 \begin_inset space ~
43964 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43980 arg "layout-paragraph"
43988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43994 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43996 \begin_inset space ~
44005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44014 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44028 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44042 \begin_layout Subsection
44043 View/Update Toolbar
44044 \begin_inset Index idx
44047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44048 Toolbar ! View / Update
44056 \begin_layout Standard
44057 \begin_inset Graphics
44058 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44065 \begin_layout Standard
44066 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44072 \begin_layout Standard
44073 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44077 \begin_layout Standard
44078 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44084 \begin_layout Standard
44085 \begin_inset Tabular
44086 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44087 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44088 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44089 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44090 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44113 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44129 arg "buffer-update"
44137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44150 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44159 arg "master-buffer-view"
44167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44173 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44175 \begin_inset space ~
44184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44193 arg "master-buffer-update"
44201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44213 \begin_inset space ~
44222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44231 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44245 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44246 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44247 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44248 Synchronize with Output
44254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44277 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44278 View (Other Formats)
44284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44291 arg "update-others"
44299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44306 Update (Other Formats)
44319 \begin_layout Standard
44320 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44324 \begin_layout Subsection
44328 \begin_layout Standard
44329 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44330 \begin_inset space ~
44334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44336 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44340 , the table toolbar
44341 \begin_inset Index idx
44344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44353 \begin_inset space ~
44358 manual and the math macro toolbar
44359 \begin_inset Index idx
44362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44375 \begin_layout Chapter
44376 The Document Settings
44377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44379 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44384 \begin_inset Index idx
44387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44388 Document ! Settings
44396 \begin_layout Standard
44400 \begin_inset space ~
44405 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44406 is called with the menu
44408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44412 You can save your document settings as default with the
44414 Save as Document Defaults
44416 button in any dialog.
44417 This will create a template named
44421 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44422 when you create a new document without
44426 \begin_layout Standard
44431 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44432 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44435 \begin_layout Standard
44436 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44437 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44438 to find the one you are looking for.
44439 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44440 the submenus of the dialog.
44442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44446 \begin_inset space \space{}
44450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44457 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44458 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44459 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44462 \begin_layout Section
44466 \begin_layout Standard
44467 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44469 Document classes are described in section
44470 \begin_inset space ~
44474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44476 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44484 \begin_layout Standard
44488 \begin_inset space ~
44493 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44498 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44499 as a layout for a document class.
44500 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44502 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44511 \begin_layout Standard
44512 Some classes use special class options by default.
44513 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44517 and you can decide to use them or not.
44518 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44519 recommended you leave them untouched.
44524 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44525 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44530 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44532 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44538 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44539 \begin_inset Newline newline
44544 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44547 \begin_inset Newline newline
44550 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44551 distribution, see section
44556 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44558 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44571 \begin_layout Standard
44576 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44577 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44578 in the background if the child document
44579 is opened without its master.
44580 This way child documents are always compilable.
44581 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44588 \begin_inset space ~
44596 \begin_layout Standard
44597 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44608 \begin_inset Index idx
44611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44613 packages ! prettyref
44619 \begin_inset Index idx
44622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44624 packages ! refstyle
44629 for cross-references, see section
44630 \begin_inset space ~
44634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44636 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44643 \begin_layout Section
44647 \begin_layout Standard
44648 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
44649 Please refer to the section
44652 \begin_inset space ~
44660 \begin_inset space ~
44665 manual for details.
44668 \begin_layout Section
44672 \begin_layout Standard
44673 Modules are explained in section
44674 \begin_inset space ~
44678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44680 reference "subsec:Modules"
44687 \begin_layout Section
44691 \begin_layout Standard
44693 \begin_inset space ~
44697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44699 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
44706 \begin_layout Section
44710 \begin_layout Standard
44711 The document font settings are described in section
44712 \begin_inset space ~
44716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44718 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
44725 \begin_layout Section
44729 \begin_layout Standard
44730 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
44742 \begin_inset space ~
44747 and whether it should be a
44750 \begin_inset space ~
44755 can also be specified here.
44758 \begin_layout Standard
44759 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
44760 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
44761 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
44763 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
44766 \begin_layout Standard
44769 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
44772 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
44773 justifies the text on screen.
44774 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
44778 \begin_layout Section
44782 \begin_layout Standard
44783 This dialog is described in sections
44784 \begin_inset space ~
44788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44790 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
44795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44797 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
44804 \begin_layout Section
44808 \begin_layout Standard
44809 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
44810 \begin_inset space ~
44814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44816 reference "subsec:Margins"
44823 \begin_layout Section
44825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44827 name "sec:Language-encodings"
44832 \begin_inset Index idx
44835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44836 Language ! Encoding
44844 \begin_layout Standard
44845 The document language and quote styles are set here.
44846 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44847 (the \SpecialChar LyX
44849 is always encoded in utf8).
44850 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
44851 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
44852 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
44853 -command is not known for
44854 a particular character).
44857 \begin_layout Standard
44858 If you use the option
44863 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
44864 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
44865 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44867 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
44868 exactly one encoding.
44869 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
44872 \begin_layout Standard
44874 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
44875 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
44876 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44877 installation supports Unicode), choose
44878 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
44879 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44880 is quite incomplete, so
44881 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
44886 (when \SpecialChar LyX
44887 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44888 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
44889 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
44890 -commands is not used, because all
44891 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
44892 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44893 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44894 , two new alternative engines
44895 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
44897 Both engines support Unicode natively.
44899 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
44902 \begin_inset space ~
44910 \begin_inset space ~
44918 \begin_inset space ~
44924 \begin_inset space ~
44928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44930 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
44935 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
44939 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
44942 \begin_layout Standard
44946 \begin_inset space ~
44951 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44952 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
44954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44962 The possible settings are:
44965 \begin_layout Description
44966 Default uses the language package that is selected in
44968 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44969 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44973 \begin_inset space ~
44977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44979 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44986 \begin_layout Description
44987 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
44988 format you will use.
44989 In many cases this will be
44994 \begin_inset Index idx
44997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45005 If the newer package
45010 \begin_inset Index idx
45013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45015 packages ! polyglossia
45020 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45021 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45022 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45024 this package will be used instead of
45031 \begin_layout Description
45033 \begin_inset space ~
45044 would be more appropriate.
45047 \begin_layout Description
45048 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45049 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45053 (for German texts), type in
45056 \begin_inset Newline newline
45061 usepackage{ngerman}
45064 \begin_layout Description
45065 None will not use a language package.
45066 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45069 \begin_layout Standard
45070 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45073 \begin_layout Description
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45079 \begin_inset space ~
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45090 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45096 \begin_inset Index idx
45099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45101 packages ! inputenc
45107 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45108 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45109 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45113 \begin_layout Description
45114 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45116 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45117 commands, which may result in a big
45118 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45119 -commands are needed.
45122 \begin_layout Description
45124 \begin_inset space ~
45128 \begin_inset space ~
45131 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45134 \begin_layout Description
45136 \begin_inset space ~
45140 \begin_inset space ~
45143 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45146 \begin_layout Description
45148 \begin_inset space ~
45151 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45154 \begin_layout Description
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45160 \begin_inset space ~
45163 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45164 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45167 \begin_layout Description
45169 \begin_inset space ~
45173 \begin_inset space ~
45176 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45180 \begin_layout Description
45182 \begin_inset space ~
45186 \begin_inset space ~
45189 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45190 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45193 \begin_layout Description
45195 \begin_inset space ~
45199 \begin_inset space ~
45203 \begin_inset space ~
45206 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45207 \begin_inset space ~
45213 \begin_layout Description
45215 \begin_inset space ~
45219 \begin_inset space ~
45223 \begin_inset space ~
45226 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45227 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45230 \begin_layout Description
45232 \begin_inset space ~
45236 \begin_inset space ~
45239 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45240 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45241 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45242 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45243 \begin_inset space ~
45247 \begin_inset space ~
45253 \begin_layout Description
45255 \begin_inset space ~
45259 \begin_inset space ~
45262 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45263 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45264 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45266 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45267 \begin_inset space ~
45271 \begin_inset space ~
45277 \begin_layout Description
45279 \begin_inset space ~
45283 \begin_inset space ~
45286 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45289 \begin_layout Description
45291 \begin_inset space ~
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45298 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45301 \begin_layout Description
45303 \begin_inset space ~
45307 \begin_inset space ~
45310 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45313 \begin_layout Description
45315 \begin_inset space ~
45318 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45321 \begin_layout Description
45323 \begin_inset space ~
45326 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45329 \begin_layout Description
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45335 \begin_inset space ~
45338 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45341 \begin_layout Description
45343 \begin_inset space ~
45347 \begin_inset space ~
45353 \begin_layout Description
45355 \begin_inset space ~
45359 \begin_inset space ~
45362 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45365 \begin_layout Description
45367 \begin_inset space ~
45371 \begin_inset space ~
45377 \begin_layout Description
45379 \begin_inset space ~
45383 \begin_inset space ~
45386 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45392 \begin_inset Index idx
45395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45402 , when using this, set the document language to
45407 \begin_layout Description
45409 \begin_inset space ~
45413 \begin_inset space ~
45416 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45421 , when using this, set the document language to
45424 \begin_inset space ~
45430 \begin_layout Description
45432 \begin_inset space ~
45436 \begin_inset space ~
45439 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45445 \begin_inset Index idx
45448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45450 packages ! japanese
45455 , when using this, set the document language to
45460 \begin_layout Description
45462 \begin_inset space ~
45466 \begin_inset space ~
45469 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45474 , when using this, set the document language to
45479 \begin_layout Description
45481 \begin_inset space ~
45485 \begin_inset space ~
45488 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45493 , when using this, set the document language to
45498 \begin_layout Description
45500 \begin_inset space ~
45503 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45506 \begin_layout Description
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45512 \begin_inset space ~
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45519 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45522 \begin_layout Description
45524 \begin_inset space ~
45528 \begin_inset space ~
45532 \begin_inset space ~
45535 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45536 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45537 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45540 \begin_layout Description
45542 \begin_inset space ~
45546 \begin_inset space ~
45552 \begin_layout Description
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45558 \begin_inset space ~
45561 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45562 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45565 \begin_layout Description
45567 \begin_inset space ~
45571 \begin_inset space ~
45574 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45580 \begin_inset Index idx
45583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45590 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45593 \begin_layout Description
45595 \begin_inset space ~
45603 \begin_inset space ~
45606 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
45613 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45616 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45623 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45624 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45626 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
45629 \begin_layout Description
45631 \begin_inset space ~
45635 \begin_inset space ~
45638 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45644 \begin_inset Index idx
45647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45654 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
45657 \begin_layout Description
45659 \begin_inset space ~
45662 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45668 \begin_inset Index idx
45671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45673 packages ! inputenc
45679 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
45683 \begin_layout Description
45685 \begin_inset space ~
45689 \begin_inset space ~
45693 \begin_inset space ~
45696 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
45697 \begin_inset space ~
45703 \begin_layout Description
45705 \begin_inset space ~
45709 \begin_inset space ~
45713 \begin_inset space ~
45716 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
45717 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
45718 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
45722 \begin_layout Description
45724 \begin_inset space ~
45728 \begin_inset space ~
45732 \begin_inset space ~
45735 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
45736 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
45739 \begin_layout Section
45741 \begin_inset Index idx
45744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45751 \begin_inset Index idx
45754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45761 \begin_inset Index idx
45764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45765 Color ! Shaded boxes
45771 \begin_inset Index idx
45774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45775 Color ! Greyed-out notes
45783 \begin_layout Standard
45784 Here you can alter the font color for the
45788 (default: black), for
45791 \begin_inset space ~
45796 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
45800 (default: white) and for
45803 \begin_inset space ~
45813 sets the color back to the default.
45816 \begin_layout Standard
45817 Clicking any button showing
45825 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
45826 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
45827 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
45828 later more quickly.
45831 \begin_layout Standard
45832 Note, if you change the
45835 \begin_inset space ~
45840 font color and use the option
45843 \begin_inset space ~
45848 in the document settings under
45851 \begin_inset space ~
45856 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
45857 \begin_inset space ~
45861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45863 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
45870 \begin_layout Standard
45871 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
45877 \begin_layout Standard
45881 \begin_inset space ~
45890 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
45893 \begin_inset space ~
45896 Code after a forced page break:
45899 \begin_layout Itemize
45900 For the page color:
45901 \begin_inset Newline newline
45908 pagecolor{color name}
45911 \begin_layout Itemize
45912 For the text color:
45913 \begin_inset Newline newline
45923 \begin_layout Standard
45924 You are restricted to one of
45960 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
45967 \begin_inset space ~
45973 \begin_inset Newline newline
45976 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
45977 names to refer to them:
45980 \begin_layout Itemize
45986 \begin_inset Newline newline
45991 page_backgroundcolor
45994 \begin_layout Itemize
45998 \begin_inset space ~
46004 \begin_inset Newline newline
46012 \begin_layout Itemize
46016 \begin_inset space ~
46022 \begin_inset Newline newline
46030 \begin_layout Itemize
46034 \begin_inset space ~
46040 \begin_inset Newline newline
46048 \begin_layout Standard
46049 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46052 \begin_inset space ~
46060 \begin_inset space ~
46068 \begin_layout Section
46072 \begin_layout Standard
46073 Here you can adjust the
46077 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46081 as described in section
46082 \begin_inset space ~
46086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46088 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46095 \begin_layout Section
46099 \begin_layout Standard
46100 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46106 \begin_inset Index idx
46109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46111 packages ! biblatex
46121 \begin_inset Index idx
46124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46136 \begin_inset Index idx
46139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46147 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46150 Sectioned bibliography
46152 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46158 \begin_inset Index idx
46161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46163 packages ! bibtopic
46173 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46174 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46178 for the generation of the bibliography.
46179 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46180 \begin_inset space ~
46184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46186 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46193 \begin_layout Section
46197 \begin_layout Standard
46198 Here you can define the
46202 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46204 \begin_inset space ~
46208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46210 reference "sec:Index"
46217 \begin_layout Section
46221 \begin_layout Standard
46222 The PDF properties are explained in section
46223 \begin_inset space ~
46227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46229 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46236 \begin_layout Section
46240 \begin_layout Standard
46241 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
46242 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46248 \begin_inset Index idx
46251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46263 \begin_inset Index idx
46266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46278 \begin_inset Index idx
46281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46293 \begin_inset Index idx
46296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46308 \begin_inset Index idx
46311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46313 packages ! mathdots
46323 \begin_inset Index idx
46326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46328 packages ! mathtools
46338 \begin_inset Index idx
46341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46353 \begin_inset Index idx
46356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46358 packages ! stackrel
46368 \begin_inset Index idx
46371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46373 packages ! stmaryrd
46383 \begin_inset Index idx
46386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46388 packages ! undertilde
46393 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46396 \begin_layout Description
46397 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46398 -errors in formulas,
46399 ensure that you have this enabled.
46402 \begin_layout Description
46403 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46404 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46405 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46409 \begin_layout Description
46410 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46413 \begin_inset space ~
46425 \begin_layout Description
46426 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46429 \begin_inset space ~
46441 \begin_layout Description
46442 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46453 \begin_layout Description
46454 mathtools is used for the math commands
46490 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46497 \begin_layout Description
46498 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46500 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46509 \begin_layout Description
46510 stackrel is used for the math command
46527 \begin_layout Description
46528 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46531 \begin_layout Description
46532 undertilde is used for the math command
46540 Accents for one Character
46549 \begin_layout Section
46551 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
46553 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
46559 \begin_layout Standard
46561 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
46562 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
46565 \begin_layout Standard
46567 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
46568 The float placement options
46569 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
46572 are described in the section
46575 \begin_inset space ~
46579 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
46581 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
46589 \begin_inset space ~
46597 \begin_layout Section
46601 \begin_layout Standard
46602 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46604 Program Code Listings
46609 \begin_inset space ~
46617 \begin_layout Section
46621 \begin_layout Standard
46622 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
46630 set to be used and set the
46635 The itemize environment is described in section
46636 \begin_inset space ~
46640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46642 reference "sec:Itemize"
46649 \begin_layout Standard
46650 You can furthermore specify a
46653 \begin_inset space ~
46658 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46659 command of the desired character.
46660 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
46667 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
46669 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46673 \begin_inset space \space{}
46677 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
46687 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
46688 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
46691 \begin_layout Standard
46692 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46700 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46701 -packages in the preamble (menu
46704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46705 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46708 \begin_inset space ~
46714 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
46718 usepackage{textcomp}
46721 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
46725 usepackage{amssymb}
46735 \begin_layout Section
46739 \begin_layout Standard
46740 Branches are described in section
46741 \begin_inset space ~
46745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46747 reference "sec:Branches"
46754 \begin_layout Section
46756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46758 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
46765 \begin_layout Standard
46766 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
46769 \begin_layout Description
46771 \begin_inset space ~
46775 \begin_inset space ~
46778 Format: The format that is used when you enter
46779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46798 View Master Document
46799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46806 Update Master Document
46807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46814 menu or the toolbar.
46815 The default is set in
46817 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46818 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46820 \begin_inset space ~
46823 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46827 \begin_inset space ~
46831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46833 reference "sec:File-Formats"
46840 \begin_layout Description
46842 \begin_inset space ~
46846 \begin_inset space ~
46849 Output settings for the menu
46851 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46853 \begin_inset space ~
46859 For a detailed description see section
46861 Reverse DVI/PDF search
46866 \begin_inset space ~
46874 \begin_layout Description
46876 \begin_inset space ~
46880 \begin_inset space ~
46883 Options offers settings for the export format
46891 \begin_inset space ~
46896 will assure that the output follows exactly version
46897 \begin_inset space ~
46900 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
46904 \begin_inset space ~
46909 settings are described in detail in section
46911 Math Output in XHTML
46916 \begin_inset space ~
46925 \begin_inset space ~
46929 \begin_inset space ~
46934 is used for the size of equations in the output.
46937 \begin_layout Description
46939 \begin_inset space ~
46944 Save transient properties
46946 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
46947 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
46948 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
46952 \begin_layout Itemize
46953 the activation of change tracking
46956 \begin_layout Itemize
46957 the output of tracked changes
46960 \begin_layout Itemize
46961 the recording of the document directory path.
46964 \begin_layout Standard
46965 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
46966 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
46970 \begin_layout Section
46978 \begin_layout Standard
46979 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46981 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
46983 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46985 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
46989 \begin_layout Standard
46990 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46991 -syntax is given in section
46992 \begin_inset space ~
46996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46998 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47005 \begin_layout Chapter
47011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47013 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47018 \begin_inset Index idx
47021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47030 \begin_layout Standard
47031 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47033 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47037 It has the following submenus.
47040 \begin_layout Section
47044 \begin_layout Subsection
47048 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47049 User Interface File
47050 \begin_inset Index idx
47053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47054 Customization ! of toolbars
47060 \begin_inset Index idx
47063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47064 Customization ! of menus
47072 \begin_layout Standard
47073 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47074 interface (ui) file.
47075 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47083 \begin_layout Description
47088 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47091 \begin_layout Description
47098 the menu entries in popup context menus
47101 \begin_layout Description
47106 specifies the toolbar buttons
47109 \begin_layout Standard
47110 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47111 and edit the entries.
47114 \begin_layout Standard
47115 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47127 entries must be finished with an explicit
47152 and in the case of the
47153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47165 The syntax for the entries is:
47168 \begin_layout Standard
47169 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47198 \begin_layout Standard
47200 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47203 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47204 -functions are listed in the menu
47206 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47208 \begin_inset space ~
47216 \begin_layout Standard
47217 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47223 \begin_layout Standard
47224 For example, assuming you use the menu
47226 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47229 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
47233 \begin_layout Standard
47234 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47258 \begin_layout Standard
47260 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47275 to have the sixth bookmark.
47278 \begin_layout Standard
47282 \begin_inset space ~
47287 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
47288 's toolbar buttons.
47289 The currently available icon sets are compared in
47290 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47293 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
47301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47305 \begin_layout Standard
47308 Enable tool tips in main work area
47310 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
47314 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47318 \begin_layout Standard
47323 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
47324 should display in the menu
47326 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47328 \begin_inset space ~
47336 \begin_layout Subsection
47340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47344 \begin_layout Standard
47347 Restore window layouts and geometries
47350 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47351 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47355 \begin_layout Standard
47358 Restore cursor positions
47360 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47364 \begin_layout Standard
47367 Load opened files from last session
47369 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47373 \begin_layout Standard
47376 Clear all session information
47378 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47379 sessions (cursor positions, names
47380 of last opened documents, etc.).
47383 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47387 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47392 \begin_inset Index idx
47395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47404 \begin_layout Standard
47407 Backup original documents when saving
47409 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47410 it was saved the last time.
47411 It is stored in the
47414 \begin_inset space ~
47420 \begin_inset space ~
47424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47426 reference "sec:Paths"
47430 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47433 \begin_inset space ~
47439 The backup file has the file extension
47440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47454 \begin_layout Standard
47457 Backup documents, every
47459 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47462 \begin_layout Standard
47465 Save documents compressed by default
47467 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47468 \begin_inset space ~
47472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47474 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47479 This applies to newly created documents only.
47480 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47483 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47484 Windows & work area
47487 \begin_layout Standard
47490 Open documents in tabs
47492 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47496 \begin_layout Standard
47501 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47508 \begin_inset space ~
47512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47514 reference "sec:Paths"
47518 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47525 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47526 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47527 of \SpecialChar LyX
47529 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47530 instance is created for each file.
47533 \begin_layout Standard
47536 Single close-tab button
47538 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47548 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47549 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47550 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47554 \begin_layout Standard
47555 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47563 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47564 before the change takes effect.
47572 \begin_layout Standard
47577 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47579 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47581 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47585 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47586 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47587 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47590 \begin_layout Subsection
47592 \begin_inset Index idx
47595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47604 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47611 \begin_layout Standard
47612 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
47616 \begin_layout Standard
47617 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47625 This section only deals with the fonts
47629 the \SpecialChar LyX
47631 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
47634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47635 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47646 \begin_layout Standard
47647 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47664 (depends on the system) as its
47667 \begin_inset space ~
47683 \begin_layout Standard
47684 You can change the font size with the
47691 \begin_layout Standard
47696 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
47698 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47701 points have the size of 1
47702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47706 \begin_inset space ~
47710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47712 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
47717 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
47718 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47722 The sizes are explained in detail in section
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47729 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
47736 \begin_layout Subsection
47738 \begin_inset Index idx
47741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47742 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
47749 \begin_inset Index idx
47752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47761 \begin_layout Standard
47762 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
47763 by choosing an item in the
47764 list and selecting the
47771 \begin_layout Standard
47772 By checking the option
47776 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
47779 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
47780 \begin_inset space ~
47784 \begin_inset space ~
47789 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
47792 \begin_layout Subsection
47794 \begin_inset Index idx
47797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47806 \begin_layout Standard
47807 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
47811 \begin_layout Standard
47816 enables previewing snippets of your document.
47817 This feature is described in section
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47824 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47831 \begin_layout Standard
47832 Checking the option
47835 \begin_inset space ~
47839 \begin_inset space ~
47843 \begin_inset space ~
47848 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
47851 \begin_layout Section
47853 \begin_inset Index idx
47856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47865 \begin_layout Subsection
47869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47873 \begin_layout Standard
47876 Cursor follows scrollbar
47878 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
47882 \begin_layout Standard
47883 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
47884 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
47885 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
47888 \begin_layout Standard
47891 Scroll below end of document
47893 is self-explanatory.
47896 \begin_layout Standard
47897 In \SpecialChar LyX
47898 one can jump from word to word by pressing
47905 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
47907 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
47908 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
47911 \begin_layout Standard
47914 Sort environments alphabetically
47916 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47919 \begin_layout Standard
47922 Group environments by their category
47924 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
47927 \begin_layout Standard
47932 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
47943 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47947 \begin_layout Standard
47948 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
47953 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
47954 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
47958 \begin_layout Subsection
47960 \begin_inset Index idx
47963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47970 \begin_inset Index idx
47973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47974 Settings ! Shortcuts
47982 \begin_layout Standard
47987 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
47989 Several binding files are available, among them:
47992 \begin_layout Description
47993 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
47996 \begin_layout Description
47997 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48009 \begin_layout Description
48010 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48013 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48021 \begin_layout Standard
48022 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48027 , and binding files for special languages.
48028 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48033 \begin_inset space \space{}
48037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48045 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48046 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48047 will try to use the appropriate binding
48051 \begin_layout Standard
48052 Some binding files, like
48056 , only have a limited scope.
48057 When looking at the end of the file
48061 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48064 \begin_layout Standard
48068 \begin_inset space ~
48072 \begin_inset space ~
48077 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48078 in the selected key binding file.
48081 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48085 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48090 \begin_inset Index idx
48093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48094 Key Bindings ! Editing
48102 \begin_layout Standard
48103 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48104 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48105 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48106 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48109 Show key-bindings containing
48112 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48113 Insert there for example as keyword
48114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48121 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48122 functions that contain
48123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48131 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48132 All \SpecialChar LyX
48133 functions are also listed in the file
48138 that you will find in the
48145 \begin_layout Standard
48146 For example, to add the shortcut
48154 , select the function and press the
48159 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48160 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48163 \begin_layout Standard
48164 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48165 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48167 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48168 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48170 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48175 \begin_layout Standard
48176 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48179 \begin_layout Standard
48180 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48182 The syntax of the entries is:
48185 \begin_layout Standard
48191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48210 \begin_layout Standard
48211 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48212 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48213 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48240 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
48241 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
48242 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
48243 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
48245 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
48249 , you needed to specify it as
48254 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
48257 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
48260 \begin_layout Subsection
48262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48264 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
48269 \begin_inset Index idx
48272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48279 \begin_inset Index idx
48282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48283 Settings ! Keyboard Map
48291 \begin_layout Standard
48292 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
48293 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
48294 provides keyboard maps.
48295 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
48296 is a Romanian one, you can enable
48299 \begin_inset space ~
48303 \begin_inset space ~
48308 and select the keyboard map file named
48315 \begin_layout Standard
48324 keyboard map and, if you use the
48328 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48331 arg "keymap-primary"
48337 arg "keymap-secondary"
48340 respectively or toggle between them with
48343 arg "keymap-toggle"
48349 \begin_layout Standard
48350 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48358 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48367 \begin_layout Standard
48368 You can also specify the mouse
48370 Wheel scrolling speed
48373 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48377 Middle mouse button pasting
48379 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48380 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48383 \begin_layout Standard
48391 \begin_inset space ~
48395 \begin_inset space ~
48400 you can select a key for zooming.
48401 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48404 \begin_layout Subsection
48408 \begin_layout Standard
48409 Input completion is described in section
48410 \begin_inset space ~
48414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48416 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48423 \begin_layout Section
48425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48432 \begin_inset Index idx
48435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48442 \begin_inset Index idx
48445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48454 \begin_layout Standard
48455 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48456 are normally determined during
48458 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48461 \begin_layout Description
48463 \begin_inset space ~
48466 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48467 's working directory.
48468 It is the default when you
48479 \begin_inset space ~
48487 \begin_layout Description
48489 \begin_inset space ~
48492 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
48494 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48496 \begin_inset space ~
48500 \begin_inset space ~
48508 \begin_layout Description
48510 \begin_inset space ~
48513 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
48519 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48523 \begin_inset Newline newline
48527 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48539 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48540 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48548 \begin_layout Description
48550 \begin_inset space ~
48554 \begin_inset Index idx
48557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48563 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48564 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48565 \begin_inset space ~
48569 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48571 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48579 will be used to save the backups.
48580 \begin_inset Newline newline
48583 Backup files have the ending
48584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48594 \begin_layout Description
48596 \begin_inset space ~
48599 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
48600 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
48602 \begin_inset Newline newline
48609 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48615 You can edit this file with the program
48624 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
48625 in its preferences under
48628 \begin_inset space ~
48634 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
48639 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
48641 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
48642 in your \SpecialChar LyX
48648 and \SpecialChar LyX
48649 need to be running the same time.
48650 \begin_inset Newline newline
48653 The pipe is also used for the
48657 feature, see section
48658 \begin_inset space ~
48662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48664 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48669 \begin_inset Newline newline
48672 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
48673 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
48674 \begin_inset Newline newline
48690 \begin_layout Description
48692 \begin_inset space ~
48695 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
48698 \begin_layout Description
48700 \begin_inset space ~
48703 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
48704 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
48705 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
48708 \begin_layout Description
48710 \begin_inset space ~
48713 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
48719 You only need to specify it if you are using
48723 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
48725 For \SpecialChar LyX
48730 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
48734 \begin_layout Description
48736 \begin_inset space ~
48739 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
48740 When \SpecialChar LyX
48741 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
48742 to find it on the system.
48743 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
48745 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
48747 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48754 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
48755 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
48758 \begin_layout Description
48760 \begin_inset space ~
48763 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
48764 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
48765 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
48766 code or in the document
48768 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
48770 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
48771 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
48772 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
48773 scanned for the input files.
48774 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
48775 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
48777 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
48778 compilation may fail for some documents.
48781 \begin_layout Section
48785 \begin_layout Standard
48786 Here you can insert your
48795 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
48797 \begin_inset space ~
48801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48803 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48807 , to mark changes you make as yours.
48810 \begin_layout Section
48812 \begin_inset Index idx
48815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48816 Language ! Settings
48822 \begin_inset Index idx
48825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48826 Settings ! Language
48834 \begin_layout Subsection
48836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48838 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48845 \begin_layout Description
48847 \begin_inset space ~
48851 \begin_inset space ~
48854 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
48856 You can find its actual translation status here:
48857 \begin_inset CommandInset href
48859 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
48867 \begin_layout Description
48869 \begin_inset space ~
48872 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
48873 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
48874 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
48875 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
48876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48892 The most widespread language package is
48897 \begin_inset Index idx
48900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48907 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
48909 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48910 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48911 come with the alternative
48917 \begin_inset Index idx
48920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48922 packages ! polyglossia
48927 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
48928 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
48934 The available selections are described in section
48935 \begin_inset space ~
48939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48941 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
48948 \begin_layout Description
48950 \begin_inset space ~
48953 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48954 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
48955 you can here specify the command to start the package.
48956 An example is the start command
48962 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
48964 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
48968 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
48984 selectlanguage{$$lang}
48989 \begin_layout Description
48991 \begin_inset space ~
48999 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49000 command toggles the package on and off.
49003 \begin_layout Description
49005 \begin_inset space ~
49009 \begin_inset space ~
49012 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49016 \begin_layout Description
49018 \begin_inset space ~
49022 \begin_inset space ~
49025 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49029 \begin_layout Description
49031 \begin_inset space ~
49035 \begin_inset space ~
49038 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49039 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49040 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49042 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49049 \begin_layout Description
49051 \begin_inset space ~
49054 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49056 When this option is not set, the
49059 \begin_inset space ~
49064 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49066 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49069 \begin_inset space ~
49077 \begin_layout Description
49079 \begin_inset space ~
49085 \begin_inset space ~
49091 When it is not set, the
49094 \begin_inset space ~
49099 is set to the end of the document.
49102 \begin_layout Description
49104 \begin_inset space ~
49108 \begin_inset space ~
49111 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49112 language will be underlined in blue.
49115 \begin_layout Description
49117 \begin_inset space ~
49121 \begin_inset space ~
49124 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49125 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49128 \begin_layout Description
49130 \begin_inset space ~
49133 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49134 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
49135 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
49136 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
49139 \begin_layout Subsection
49143 \begin_layout Standard
49144 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
49145 \begin_inset space ~
49149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49151 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
49158 \begin_layout Section
49162 \begin_layout Subsection
49164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49166 name "subsec:General-output"
49173 \begin_layout Description
49175 \begin_inset space ~
49178 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49180 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49182 \begin_inset space ~
49188 For a detailed description see section
49190 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49195 \begin_inset space ~
49203 \begin_layout Description
49205 \begin_inset space ~
49208 Options Options for the program
49212 that is used for the export format
49217 \begin_inset space ~
49221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49223 reference "subsec:Export"
49228 Possible options are listed in the
49233 \begin_inset Newline newline
49237 \begin_inset Flex URL
49240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49242 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
49252 \begin_layout Description
49254 \begin_inset space ~
49258 \begin_inset space ~
49261 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
49264 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49265 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
49267 \begin_inset space ~
49273 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
49276 \begin_layout Description
49278 \begin_inset space ~
49282 \begin_inset Index idx
49285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49292 \begin_inset Index idx
49295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49296 Settings ! Date format
49301 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
49302 \begin_inset Newline newline
49306 \begin_inset Flex URL
49309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49311 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
49317 \begin_inset Newline newline
49320 For example the format
49321 \begin_inset Newline newline
49325 \begin_inset Newline newline
49328 prints the date as day/month/year.
49331 \begin_layout Description
49333 \begin_inset space ~
49337 \begin_inset space ~
49340 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49341 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49344 \begin_layout Subsection
49350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49352 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49357 \begin_inset Index idx
49360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49361 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49370 \begin_layout Description
49372 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49374 \begin_inset space ~
49382 \begin_inset space ~
49386 \begin_inset space ~
49389 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49394 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49415 are used for Cyrillic.
49416 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49429 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49431 sets up in the background.
49432 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49437 \begin_layout Description
49439 \begin_inset space ~
49443 \begin_inset space ~
49447 \begin_inset space ~
49451 \begin_inset space ~
49454 options They only have an effect when the program
49458 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49461 \begin_layout Standard
49462 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49463 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49464 manuals of the applications.
49467 \begin_layout Description
49469 \begin_inset space ~
49472 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49473 \begin_inset space ~
49477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49479 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49486 \begin_layout Description
49488 \begin_inset space ~
49491 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49492 \begin_inset space ~
49496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49498 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49505 \begin_layout Description
49507 \begin_inset space ~
49510 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49511 \begin_inset space ~
49515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49517 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49524 \begin_layout Description
49530 \begin_inset space ~
49533 command Command for the program
49535 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49538 that is described in the section
49540 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49545 Additional Features
49550 \begin_layout Standard
49551 There are additionally the following options:
49554 \begin_layout Description
49556 \begin_inset space ~
49560 \begin_inset space ~
49564 \begin_inset space ~
49568 \begin_inset space ~
49573 \begin_inset space ~
49576 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
49577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49587 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49594 to separate folders.
49595 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
49597 \begin_inset Index idx
49600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49607 \begin_inset Index idx
49610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49619 \begin_layout Description
49621 \begin_inset space ~
49625 \begin_inset space ~
49629 \begin_inset space ~
49633 \begin_inset space ~
49637 \begin_inset space ~
49641 \begin_inset space ~
49644 changes Removes all manually set
49650 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49651 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49653 \begin_inset space ~
49658 dialog when changing the document class.
49661 \begin_layout Section
49663 \begin_inset space ~
49667 \begin_inset Index idx
49670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49679 \begin_layout Subsection
49681 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49683 name "subsec:Converters"
49688 \begin_inset Index idx
49691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49700 \begin_layout Standard
49701 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
49702 from one format to another.
49703 You can modify converters or create new ones.
49704 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
49711 \begin_inset space ~
49716 field and press the
49721 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
49725 \begin_inset space ~
49730 drop-down list, modify the
49734 field and press the
49741 \begin_layout Standard
49744 Converter File Cache
49750 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
49752 Maximum Age (in days
49755 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
49756 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
49759 \begin_layout Standard
49760 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
49761 definition, is described in the section
49772 \begin_layout Subsection
49774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49776 name "sec:File-Formats"
49781 \begin_inset Index idx
49784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49791 \begin_inset Index idx
49794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49803 \begin_layout Standard
49804 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
49814 programs that should be used for certain formats.
49817 \begin_layout Standard
49818 You can also define the
49820 Default output format
49822 that is used when you use
49824 View, Update, View Master Document
49828 Update Master Document
49834 menu or the toolbar.
49837 \begin_layout Standard
49838 More about formats and their options is described in the section
49849 \begin_layout Standard
49850 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
49852 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
49853 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
49854 This is done by specifying a
49859 More about this is described in the section
49870 \begin_layout Chapter
49871 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49873 \begin_inset Index idx
49876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49885 name "chap:Units-available-in"
49892 \begin_layout Standard
49894 \begin_inset space ~
49898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49900 reference "tab:Units"
49904 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
49905 and used in this documentation.
49908 \begin_layout Standard
49909 \begin_inset Float table
49915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49916 \begin_inset Caption Standard
49918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49934 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49942 \begin_inset Tabular
49943 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
49944 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
49945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49946 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
49947 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
49949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49993 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50096 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50100 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50156 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50165 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50265 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50371 scaled point (65536
50372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50439 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50563 % of original image width
50568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50652 \begin_layout Standard
50653 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50656 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
50663 \begin_layout Bibliography
50664 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50665 LatexCommand bibitem
50672 The \SpecialChar LyX
50674 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50677 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
50683 \begin_inset Newline newline
50687 \begin_inset Flex URL
50690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50692 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
50700 \begin_layout Bibliography
50701 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50702 LatexCommand bibitem
50703 key "latexcompanion"
50708 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
50710 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50711 Companion Second Edition.
50714 Addison-Wesley, 2004
50717 \begin_layout Bibliography
50718 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50719 LatexCommand bibitem
50725 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
50728 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50732 Addison-Wesley, 2003
50735 \begin_layout Bibliography
50736 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50737 LatexCommand bibitem
50746 : A Document Preparation System.
50749 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
50752 \begin_layout Bibliography
50753 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50754 LatexCommand bibitem
50764 The \SpecialChar TeX
50768 Addison-Wesley, 1984
50771 \begin_layout Bibliography
50772 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50773 LatexCommand bibitem
50779 The \SpecialChar TeX
50781 \begin_inset Newline newline
50785 \begin_inset Flex URL
50788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50790 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
50798 \begin_layout Bibliography
50799 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50800 LatexCommand bibitem
50806 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50808 \begin_inset Newline newline
50812 \begin_inset Flex URL
50815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50817 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
50825 \begin_layout Bibliography
50826 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50827 LatexCommand bibitem
50834 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50836 name "Documentation"
50837 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
50844 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50848 \begin_inset Newline newline
50852 \begin_inset Flex URL
50855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50857 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
50865 \begin_layout Bibliography
50866 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50867 LatexCommand bibitem
50874 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50876 name "Documentation"
50877 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
50882 how to use the program
50884 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50888 \begin_inset Newline newline
50892 \begin_inset Flex URL
50895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50897 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
50905 \begin_layout Bibliography
50906 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50907 LatexCommand bibitem
50914 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50916 name "Documentation"
50917 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
50922 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50928 \begin_inset Index idx
50931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50933 packages ! biblatex
50939 \begin_inset Newline newline
50943 \begin_inset Flex URL
50946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50948 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
50956 \begin_layout Bibliography
50957 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50958 LatexCommand bibitem
50965 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50967 name "Documentation"
50968 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
50973 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50979 \begin_inset Index idx
50982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50990 \begin_inset Newline newline
50994 \begin_inset Flex URL
50997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50999 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51007 \begin_layout Bibliography
51008 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51009 LatexCommand bibitem
51016 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51018 name "Documentation"
51019 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51029 \begin_inset Newline newline
51033 \begin_inset Flex URL
51036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51038 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51046 \begin_layout Bibliography
51047 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51048 LatexCommand bibitem
51049 key "makeindex-man"
51055 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51058 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51068 \begin_inset Newline newline
51072 \begin_inset Flex URL
51075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51077 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51085 \begin_layout Bibliography
51086 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51087 LatexCommand bibitem
51094 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51096 name "Documentation"
51097 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51107 \begin_inset Newline newline
51111 \begin_inset Flex URL
51114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51116 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51124 \begin_layout Bibliography
51125 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51126 LatexCommand bibitem
51133 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51135 name "Documentation"
51136 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
51141 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
51143 \begin_inset Newline newline
51147 \begin_inset Flex URL
51150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51152 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
51160 \begin_layout Bibliography
51161 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51162 LatexCommand bibitem
51169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51171 name "Documentation"
51172 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51177 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51183 \begin_inset Index idx
51186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51194 \begin_inset Newline newline
51198 \begin_inset Flex URL
51201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51203 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
51211 \begin_layout Bibliography
51212 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51213 LatexCommand bibitem
51220 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51222 name "Documentation"
51223 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
51228 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51234 \begin_inset Index idx
51237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51239 packages ! enumitem
51245 \begin_inset Newline newline
51249 \begin_inset Flex URL
51252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51254 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
51262 \begin_layout Bibliography
51263 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51264 LatexCommand bibitem
51271 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51273 name "Documentation"
51274 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
51279 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51285 \begin_inset Index idx
51288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51290 packages ! fancyhdr
51296 \begin_inset Newline newline
51300 \begin_inset Flex URL
51303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51305 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
51313 \begin_layout Bibliography
51314 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51315 LatexCommand bibitem
51322 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51324 name "Documentation"
51325 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51330 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51336 \begin_inset Index idx
51339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51341 packages ! hyperref
51347 \begin_inset Newline newline
51351 \begin_inset Flex URL
51354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51356 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51364 \begin_layout Bibliography
51365 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51366 LatexCommand bibitem
51373 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51375 name "Documentation"
51376 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51381 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51387 \begin_inset Index idx
51390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51392 packages ! microtpye
51398 \begin_inset Newline newline
51402 \begin_inset Flex URL
51405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51407 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51415 \begin_layout Bibliography
51416 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51417 LatexCommand bibitem
51424 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51426 name "Documentation"
51427 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51432 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51438 \begin_inset Index idx
51441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51449 \begin_inset Newline newline
51453 \begin_inset Flex URL
51456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51458 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51466 \begin_layout Bibliography
51467 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51468 LatexCommand bibitem
51475 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51477 name "Documentation"
51478 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51483 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51489 \begin_inset Index idx
51492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51494 packages ! prettyref
51500 \begin_inset Newline newline
51504 \begin_inset Flex URL
51507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51509 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51517 \begin_layout Bibliography
51518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51519 LatexCommand bibitem
51526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51528 name "Documentation"
51529 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51534 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51540 \begin_inset Index idx
51543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51545 packages ! refstyle
51551 \begin_inset Newline newline
51555 \begin_inset Flex URL
51558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51560 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51568 \begin_layout Bibliography
51569 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51570 LatexCommand bibitem
51577 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51580 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
51585 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51587 \begin_inset Newline newline
51591 \begin_inset Flex URL
51594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51596 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
51604 \begin_layout Bibliography
51605 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51606 LatexCommand bibitem
51613 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51616 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
51621 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51623 \begin_inset Newline newline
51627 \begin_inset Flex URL
51630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51632 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
51640 \begin_layout Bibliography
51641 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51642 LatexCommand bibitem
51649 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51652 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
51657 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51658 for Cyrillic languages:
51659 \begin_inset Newline newline
51663 \begin_inset Flex URL
51666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51668 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
51676 \begin_layout Bibliography
51677 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51678 LatexCommand bibitem
51685 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51688 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
51693 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51695 \begin_inset Newline newline
51699 \begin_inset Flex URL
51702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51704 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
51712 \begin_layout Bibliography
51713 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51714 LatexCommand bibitem
51721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51724 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
51729 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51731 \begin_inset Newline newline
51735 \begin_inset Flex URL
51738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51740 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
51748 \begin_layout Bibliography
51749 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51750 LatexCommand bibitem
51757 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51760 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
51765 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51767 \begin_inset Newline newline
51771 \begin_inset Flex URL
51774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51776 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
51784 \begin_layout Standard
51785 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51819 \begin_inset Note Note
51822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51829 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
51830 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
51831 bibliography is the second one:
51839 \begin_layout Standard
51840 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
51841 LatexCommand bibtex
51842 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
51843 options "biblio/alphadin"
51850 \begin_layout Standard
51851 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51855 \begin_layout Standard
51859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51865 pagedeclaration}[1]{
51868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51874 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
51882 \begin_inset Note Note
51885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51886 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
51887 \begin_inset space ~
51891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51893 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
51905 \begin_layout Standard
51906 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
51907 LatexCommand printnomenclature
51913 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
51914 LatexCommand printindex